2023英语站课件(合集14篇)

【#范文大全# #2023英语站课件(合集14篇)#】编辑用心整理为大家呈现最新的“英语站课件”。为了教学更有顺利，老师会需要提前准备教案课件，需要老师把每份课件都要设计更完善。教师编写教案是向学生传授知识的重要手段之一。欢迎您持续关注我们的更新同时收藏我们的网站了解最新动态！

英语站课件(篇1)

主题：互联网对商业的影响

随着互联网的普及和应用，商业领域也发生了巨大的变化，许多企业和商家开始将重心放在互联网上，希望通过互联网来提高他们的业绩。互联网不仅提供了一种全新的销售渠道，也为企业和消费者提供了更多的便利。本文将探讨互联网对商业的影响，并剖析互联网如何改变了商业模式和人们的生活方式。

一、提供了全新的销售渠道

随着移动互联网的普及，越来越多的人选择在网上购物。电商平台迅速崛起，许多客户通过互联网购买商品不仅可以享受更多的优惠，还可以节省时间和精力。此外，互联网还提供了一个与客户交流的平台，企业可以通过各种方式与客户互动，以了解他们的需求并提供更好的服务。

二、改变了商业模式

互联网让用户在获取信息、沟通和购买产品时更加便捷，同时也使企业面临着更加激烈的市场竞争。因此，许多企业纷纷转向以客户为中心的商业模式，这种模式将客户需求放在第一位，和客户建立良好的关系，通过亲密的互动获得客户的信任和支持。

三、让人们的生活方式更加便捷

互联网的智能化和普及化，让人们的生活方式发生了很大的改变。通过互联网，人们可以在家庭中做许多事情，如看电影、购物、支付账单、预订门票等。这大大方便了人们的生活，并节约了时间和精力。

总体而言，互联网对商业的影响是积极的，它提供了全新的销售渠道，改变了商业模式，并让人们的生活方式更加便捷。随着互联网的不断发展和完善，它将为商业和消费者带来更多的机会和便利。

英语站课件(篇2)

本模块题材为童话故事，主要是关于Goldilocks的故事，另外增加了精卫填海的故事。内容和情节很容易引发学生的兴趣，语言简单易懂，描写细致生动，非常有利于开展听、说、读、写方面的语言实践活动，让学生在使用语言的过程中学习语言，促使学生更有意识地自觉学习英语。

讲故事须使用一般过去时，所以本模块继续以一般过去时作为语法学习重点。通过操练、使学生在掌握语言结构的同时、既学习语言知识、感悟语言功能、又能欣赏到美丽的童话故事，并能学会描述一个完整的故事或一件事情

词汇：once、hear、begin、decide、ride、golden、little、pick、notice、hurry、knock、nobody、push、open、enter、count、bowl、all、hungry、rush、try、destroy、unhappy、asleep、return、cry、point、without、die、emperor、onceuponatime、goforaride、pickup、lookaround、changeinto

话题：以“童话故事”(fairytales)为话题。

读：能读懂简单的故事，明白主要的人物、事件以及情节。进行简单的技能训练。

3.情感目标：通过阅读童话故事提高对英语的学习兴趣、感受学习的乐趣。

1.学习策略：形成自主学习、有效交际、信息处理、英语思维能力。

认知:联系，归纳，推测等技能。观察并归纳规则动词的一般过去式、提高自学能力。

资源：通过其他资源获取更多简单英语的“童话故事”

自学策略：能够尝试阅读一些简写的英文童话故事。能注意发现语言现象背后的规律、并能运用规律举一反三。

合作学习策略：互相学习，取长补短，注意从他人的演示中汲取经验、注意学习策略共享。

2.文化意识：比较中国童话与外国童话的异同、通过外国童话了解世界不同地方的风俗习惯、从而拓展视野、激发学习英语的兴趣。

重点：通过童话故事训练学生的听、说、读、写能力，掌握规则动词的一般过去式。

难点：掌握规则动词的一般过去式的形式和逐步形成正确使用一般过去时的意识。

能够运用规则动词的一般过去式讲述简单的故事。

我们把本模块划分为3课时：

Period1:Vocabulary and Listening、Pronunciation and Speaking

Period3:Writing、Aroundtheworld、ModuleTask

英语站课件(篇3)

当今世界科学技术迅猛发展，大学生了解国内外科学技术最新成果的重要途径之一就是阅读和掌握专业文献。特别是近年来，各学科领域最前沿的研究成果大多以英文文献的形式发表，专业英文文献的应用也就成为了科研工作的重要基础。通过专业英文文献的应用，大学生可以快速了解国内外科技信息、掌握专业领域的最新动态、学习其他科学家的科研思路，有力地促进大学生创新意识和创新能力的培养。

(一)提高学生学习新知识的能力。由于最新的专业英文文献承载着学科领域最前沿的研究成果，学生在收集、整理和阅读英文文献的过程中，会自觉不自觉地受到新知识的熏陶，久久为功，学习和掌握新知识的能力就会大幅度提高。学生查阅专业英文文献也是一种主动学习的方法，随着查阅专业英文文献数量的增多，这种主动学习的方法也就越来越熟练，不仅学生的专业英语水平会有所提高，获取新知识的能力也越来越强大。

(二)提高学生逻辑思维和语言表达能力。发表在顶级刊物上的高水平的英文论文，都是结构严谨、逻辑严密、语言精练的范文，学生大量阅读、分析这样的范文，必然会受到积极的影响。同时，学生在撰写综述、汇报文献的过程中，会进一步提高逻辑思维和语言表达能力，为撰写论文发表自己的研究成果打下基础。

(三)提高分析问题和解决问题的`能力。由于教学方式方法存在问题，部分本科生分析和解决问题的能力并不是很强，一部分学生甚至是高年级学生即使考试成绩很好，也不能对所学专业提出恰当的问题，更谈不上分析问题和解决问题。专业英文文献的应用恰恰可以弥补学生在这方面的缺陷。因为，每一篇论文的逻辑结构都是提出问题并解决问题，在大量的英文文献应用训练中，学生分析问题和解决问题的能力会逐步增强。长期坚持下去，这些能力就会转化为学生的必备素质。(四)提高学生的科研实践能力。大多数学生进入高校学习后对开展科学研究工作充满了期待，随着专业课程学习的不断深入，一部分学生已经不再满足于普通的实验课，而是对跟随专业课教师进入研究室开展研究工作产生了浓厚的兴趣。但是，由于自身的科研能力和经验不足，往往学生对所要开展的科研工作缺乏信心。这时，在专业课教师指导下就某一问题开展的专业文献特别是英文文献的检索、整理、研读、分析等工作，就成为了学生进入研究室开展科研工作的入门基石。此外，学生在开展科研工作中遇到的各种困难和问题也可以从英文文献中找到答案，帮助学生进一步提高科研实践能力。

本科生教育培养过程中，在英语“过级”指挥棒的指引下，公共基础英语课程往往被列为基础课程的重中之重，无论是学校还是学生本人，对专业英文文献应用的重视程度远远不及公共基础英语。

(一)学生认识不足，专业英语水平欠佳。由于英语教学指挥棒的因素，多数学生对公共基础英语课程学习的热情较高，忽视专业英语的学习，对英文文献应用的意义认识不清，更谈不上通过英文文献应用锻炼个人的能力。有的学生通过了英语四六级的考试，于是认为自己的英语水平已经达到了大学学习的标准，无需要再学。有的学生还没有通过四六级考试，继续埋头苦学争取通过，无暇学习专业英语。部分学生错误地认为专业英文文献应用离自己遥远，将来从事相关工作的可能性不大，而放弃了专业英文文献的应用。还有部分学生专业英语的基础差，阅读英文文献如读“天书”，又不愿意下功夫，学习兴趣不浓，学习动力不足。

(二)学校重视不足，教师没有积极性。多数高校在实际教学过程中，对英文专业文献的教学和应用没有明确的要求，甚至没有纳入正常的教学内容之中。部分专业课教师由于认识不足或英语水平的问题，无法指导学生开展英文文献的应用。一些具有相应水平的专业课教师，常常因为学生不感兴趣、专业课学时不够、没有绩效怕麻烦等原因，指导学生开展专业英文文献应用不够深入，没有达到培养大学生创新能力的作用。

(三)学生的学识水平影响专业英文文献的有效应用。由于本科生接触英文文献时对专业课的学习还没有完全展开，科学研究工作还不够深入，对英文文献中的一些专有名词、方案、数据的理解不够透彻，特别是一些先进的试验手段和仪器设备在普通的实验课上没有接触过，使学生对专业英文文献的理解出现问题，这在很大程度上影响英文文献的利用。

(一)强化学生英文文献阅读的训练。当前，科学研究日新月异，专业知识的更新速度越来越快，大量具有前沿性的科学研究成果发表在相关的英文专业期刊上，供人们查阅、学习和利用，为进一步推动科技进步，造福人类作出了贡献。专业的英文文献与一般的文艺作品，以及科普读物有所不同，有其自身的特点(包括题目、作者机构、摘要、引言、绪论、材料或实验、结果与讨论等和语法规则)。从表现形式上看，英文文献的语言表述更加严谨、逻辑性更强，晦涩的专业词汇和学术术语比较多，专业英语水平不够的学生很难看懂。从表现内容上看，专业性更强、内容更为深刻、知识更为前沿、技术更为先进。因此，在教学实践中要强化学生专业英文文献阅读训练，学生在学好专业课程和专业英语的基础上，通过大量阅读英文文献，了解英文文献的特点，提高阅读技巧，掌握英文文献的核心内容，从而提高英文文献的应用能力。

(二)引导学生有效应用英文文献。专业课教师要发挥教学的主导作用，积极推动专业课教学内容的改革。在尊重选定教材内容的基础上，通过查阅大量的本学科领域的高水平英文文献，摘取最前沿的专业知识和发展动态作为课堂教学的有益补充，激发学生的求知欲望。同时，专业课教师要结合课程进度和教学内容，精心选取若干篇典型的英文文献，就文献的结构特征、专有名词、表述内涵、成果意义、阅读关键等方面进行详细的讲解。专业课教师还要为学生讲授检索英文文献、收集英文文献的知识，要布置作业督促学生在课后查找专业英文文献并研读。专业教师要通过课程网站、电话、QQ、微信等方式保持与学生的沟通联系，随时解决学生在阅读英文文献时遇到的困难和问题，加强对学生应用专业英文文献的指导。

(三)注重对学生英文文献应用能力的考核。教师在教学过程中要注重应用专业英文文献激发学生的创新思维，对学生进行基本科研素质的引导和训练。在专业课教学过程中，教师要从多个角度梳理出若干个知识点，分配给不同的学生，要求每个学生围绕所分配到的知识点查找文献，撰写文献综述。题目可由教师指定，也可由学生自拟，但要求有一定数量的参考文献，其中英文文献要达到10%以上。优秀的文献综述报告要由作者本人在课堂上进行宣读，大家讨论。教师根据综述报告质量评定成绩，计入课程考核总成绩。在这个过程中，教师要注意发现那些具有科研潜力，并且热爱科研工作的学生，引导他们早日进入实验室，跟随教师开展科研工作。

(四)围绕英文文献开展研究与交流。开展科学研究，探索新的知识是大学生学习的最高境界，也是开设专业课程的最高境界。学生进入实验室开展课题研究之前往往充满迷茫，不知所措，然而在指导教师的引导下，经过查阅大量的文献，学生逐渐明确了自己的研究方向和研究内容。通过研究专业英文文献可以借鉴先进可行的研究方法和步骤，避免走弯路。另外，在课题研究过程中会遇到各种各样的问题和困难，解决这些困难和问题需要在大量的英文文献阅读中寻求答案和办法。学生在撰写研究论文作结论时，同样需要参考大量的英文文献，明晰研究成果的水平和价值。通过英文文献的查阅、报告、应用，可以增强学生与指导教师、课题组的其他成员、相关学者之间的交流。尤其是学生通过专业英文文献中提供的通讯方式与文献作者进行联系，就某个具体问题进行深入的研究和讨论，使学生通过专业英文文献学习到更多的专业知识，对学生创新能力的提高起到积极的促进作用。

专业英文文献应用与大学生创新能力培养有着密切的关系，强化学生的专业英文文献应用，能够有效地拓展学生的视野和知识面，增强科研兴趣，提高科研能力，促进学术交流，为深入学习研究奠定基础。因此，高校要高度重视专业英文文献教学工作，深化教学改革，在本科生的教学实践中注重对学生进行专业英文文献应用能力的培养，结合专业课教学作出英文文献的检索、整理、分析、综述、报告等内容的安排，并以此为契机引导学生开展科学研究工作，进一步增强创新能力。

英语站课件(篇4)

论文的参考文献是论文写作过程中参考过的文献著作，是对某一著作或论文的整体的参考或借鉴。

参考文献的要求:

1.在正文写作完毕后，空两行(宋体小四号)，居中书写“参考文献”四个字;“参考文献”使用宋体四号加粗,前后两个字之间不空格。

“参考文献”书写完毕后空一行(宋体小四号)再书写参考文献的具体内容。

参考文献按照其在正文中出现的先后以阿拉伯数字连续编码，参考文献的序号左顶格书写，并用数字加中括号表示，如[1]，[2]，[3]，[4]，[5]…，每一参考文献条目的最后均以英文句号“.”结束。

2.参考文献只列出作者已直接阅读、在撰写论文过程中主要参考过的文献资料，所列参考文献应按论文参考的先后顺序排列。

参考文献与正文连续编排页码。

参考文献类型及文献类型，根据GB3469-83《文献类型与文献载体代码》规定，以单字母方式标识:

(1)专著:〔序号]作者.专著名[M].出版地:出版社，出版年.

(2)期刊中析出的文献:〔序号]作者.题(篇)名[J].刊名，出版年 (期号).

(3)论文集:〔序号]作者. 题(篇)名[C]. 出版地:出版社，出版年.

(4)学位论文:〔序号]作者.题(篇)名[D].授学位地:授学位单位，授学位年.

(5)专利文献:〔序号]专利申请者.专利题名[P].专利国别:专利号,出版日期.

(6)报纸文章:〔序号]作者.题(篇)名[N].报纸名，出版日期.

(7)电子文档:〔序号]作者.题(篇)名〔文献类型/载体类型〕.网址，发表日期.

关于参考文献的未尽事项可参见国家标准《文后参考文献著录规则》(GB/T7714-2005)。

[1]李松庆，王炜.第三方物流的实证分析[M].北京:中国物资出版社，2005.

[2]李文.中国“三农”问题〔EB/OL〕. ztjj/16.htm，2004-07-19.

[3]祁之杰.我国物流资源优化配置问题探讨[J].管理现代化,2004(1).

[4]刘国钧，陈绍业，王凤翥. 图书馆目录[M]. 北京:高等教育出版社，1957.15-18.

[5]辛希孟. 信息技术和信息服务国际研讨会论文集:A集[C]. 北京:中国社会科学出版社，1994.

[6]张筑生. 微分半动力系统的不变集[D]. 北京:北京大学数学系数学研究所，1983.

[7]冯西桥. 核反应堆压力管道和压力容器的LBB分析[R]. 北京:清华大学核能技术设计研究院，1997.

[8] Gill,R. Mastering English Literature[M] . London: Macmillan,1985.

论文参考文献是不是越多越好，多少比较靠合适?

有人认为参考文献引得越多代表作者比较注重引文问题，并尊重了其他作者的成果，而有的人说引得越多，代表文章的水分也越多，也就是变成所谓的从引文里拼拼凑凑了，其实这些都没什么道理，适度即可，能说明自己的问题即可。

举个特殊的例子，比如综述，引的文献不少吧?你能说人家的水分大?反过来也一样，综述引文献也不可能面面俱到吧。

论文参考文献数量一般是多少?

一般来讲，不限篇数，特别是你题目上写要读多少期刊，更没有要求。

对这个问题的要求，不在篇数而在其它方面：

1、你所写专业里的经典文献你有没有读过，特别是一些经典的综述文章，你一定要读当然也应该引用.

2、你研究的专业里最新的文献看过没有，最好近五年的文献看了，再写文章.

3、你投稿的期刊所发表的文章你看过没有，建议也要引上一两篇.

写论文不能手头上有什么文献就算数，没有就不算数，因为学术的.发展不是以咱们知道与否来决定的，因此一定要去查找文献

现在博士、硕士论文以及本科论文参考文献数量一般要求：

博士学位论文的参考文献数一般应不少于100篇，其中外文文献一般不少于总数的1/2;硕士学位论文的参考文献一般应不少于40篇，其中外文文献一般不少于20篇。

参考文献中近五年的文献数一般应不少于总数的1/3,并应有近两年的参考文献。

本科毕业设计主要参考文献要求10篇以上，其中外文文献2篇以上(指导教师认定为特殊类型的论文，可以不列外文参考文献)。

参考文献必须是公开出版、发表的(含网上下载)着作或期刊(论文)，统一放在文后，并按文中出现的先后顺序，用阿拉伯数字进行自然编号，序码加方括号。

英语站课件(篇5)

1. 在网上收集有关节日的大量信息，通过对节日的描述，提高学生口语表达能力。

2. 比较中外不同节日文化的内涵，培养学生跨文化的国际交流意识。

3. 通过生活实例，使学生掌握中秋节的相关知识。

使学生了解并且比较中外文化的差异;能熟练掌握要学习的内容。

1. 以日常问候语引入到节日的话题(Greetings)师生对唱一首英语歌曲《Are you happy?》，从而引入节日主题，让学生列举他们所熟悉的节日。

2. 提问：你能猜到老师最喜欢哪个节日吗?为什么?(Can you guess which festival I like best?Why?)

3.导入课题：中秋节(Look!What’s this?What do you think of when you see the moon?)用一段动画传递中秋节信息，让学生说出月饼、嫦娥、团圆等相关信息。

1.网上阅读，了解中秋节的相关信息。

你想了解吗?(You know the beautiful Lady Chang’e has its beautiful stories. Do you want to read them?)展示Legend(中秋传说)、Traditions&Customs(传统风俗)和Background(历史背景)等与主题相关的内容。

2.自我检测(Self-test)自我测试对阅读内容的.理解。

相关问题：哪些内容和中秋节相关?(Which are related to Mid-autumn Day?)月饼的象征意义是什么?(What’s the meaning of the moon cake?)

三、文化比较，文化渗透(Task2&3—Listening and Speaking)

1.观看一个美国家庭过感恩节的录像(You see an American family are having their Thanksgiving dinner. Listen and watch carefully，trying to findout the differences between Mid-autumn and Thanksgiving.) 感受纯正的英语口语，在真实的情境中了解这些节日丰富的文化内涵;让学生在学习语言的同时，感受文化差异。

2.听力测验(Quiz)完成听力检测题，由计算机判断正误;师生互动反馈信息。

(1)单词银行(Word Bank)让学生在规定时间内，正确写出与中秋节有关的单词，累计得分;通过竞赛的形式，获最高分者为优胜。

(2)“嫦娥”问答(Lady Chang’e)帮助“嫦娥”正确回答五个问题，使她逐渐飞上月亮和她的玉兔团聚;巩固形容词的比较级和最高级。

2.享受网络利用网站自主搜索世界各国的节日，分析、比较和总结中外节日的异同点。

3.课后练习：

(1)收集更多节日的相关信息，下节课进行介绍。

(2)发电子邮件给一个外国网友，介绍一个中国节日;发一封邮件给教师介绍一个外国节日。

1. 通过一份评价表来评估本节课的学习效果。

2. 全班齐唱《但愿人长久》结束本课。

英语站课件(篇6)

教学目标

1、能力目标：学生能够对身高进行问答;学生能够掌握四会单词和句子;学生能够用比较级对一些事物或人进行比较。

2、知识目标：

(1)能够掌握本课时的四会单词：younger, older, taller, shorter, longer。 (2)能够掌握本课时重点句型：How tall are you ? I am ......metres. I am taller. You are shorter aller than me. You’re youngerolder than me.

3、情感目标：培养学生积极学习英语的兴趣，能积极参与课堂。

教学重难点

1、重点：学习单词：younger, older, taller, shorter, longer;掌握句子：How tall are you ? I’m 1.61 metres.I’m taller. You’re older than me,too.

2、难点：正确使用句子“......is.....than.....”进行各种比较。

教学过程

一、Preparation

1、Greeting：Nice to meet you again. How are you today?

2、Let’s chant

Tall, tall, tall, who is tall?

Tall, tall, tall, I am tall.

Short, short, short, who is short?

Short, short, short, I am short.

Big, big, big, whose(谁的) eyes are big?

Big, big, big, her eyes are big.

Small, small, small, whose eyes are small?

Small, small, small, his eyes are small.

Do some actions，review the words：tall、strong、short 等。

二、Presentation

1、教师请几位高矮胖瘦不同的学生到台前来，让学生分辨Who is tall /strong/old/young/short?，然后让学生回答。

教师指着比较高的A和比较矮的B问: Who is tall ? S :A. T: A is taller than B , 用动作来示意学生，帮助学生理解。然后出示taller的单词卡片，示范读taller.

2、教学单词taller，边说边做动作，学生跟做。开火车合拼单词,小组比赛快速熟练的拼读。帮助学生用tall+er来记忆。

3、教师用同样的方法教学其他四个四会单词stronger 、older、 younger、 shorter。

4、将五张单词卡放在一起请学生认读。男女比赛谁读错或不会读。

5、观察五个单词，有什么相同之处?然后简单解释，当两个人相比较时，使用比较级，比较级就是在形容词词尾加er.

6、教师领读几遍后，请学生根据实际情况说句子，比如“I’m taller than ….I’m short than ….”等。教师要及时鼓励表述好的学生。

7、教师把一高一矮的学生叫他们站起来，然后说You’re taller than your classmate! 引导学生做出相应的回答：Yes! 教师问，How tall are you ?学生答I’m 160cm

8、教师和另一个学生对话作示范，How tall are you ?I’m 150cm tall. I’m taller than you. I’m 4cm taller than you ..学生分组开火车练习，最快的为优胜组。

三、Practice

1、拼读比赛：教师让学生5—6人一组，告诉他们要进行拼读单词的竞赛。教师将单词中的字母组合删除，让每组学生代表填写。

2.教师带领学生继续进行比赛，打乱组成单词的字母顺序，让学生们在小组中重新排列，组成单词。

四、Production

1.每名学生尝试用句型“I’m ---- than ----“来描述自己。至少三句话。

2.小组内学生互相交流。

3.Let’s chant。

五、Progress

1.Let's play 学生小组玩游戏。

2.选择几个小组展示。

Homework

1.抄写本节课所学的五个四个单词。

2. 询问他人年龄、身高、体重。

(运用句型How old/tall/heavy are you? )

板书设计

Unit 1 How tall are you

A Let's learn

I'm taller than you.

tall-taller short –shorter

young-younger old-older

strong-stronger

英语站课件(篇7)

1. make choices about/make a choice about 做出选择

3. keep up with the high pace of modern life 跟上现代生活的快节奏

4. be good for /do good to 对…有好处

5. be harmful to/do harm to/do sb. harm 对….有害

6. help build our body 有助于构成我们的躯体

7. keep our body functioning well 使身体功能运转很好

8. choose …from/between/among 从…挑选出来

13. be short of/be low in 在….方面缺乏/贫乏（含量低）

41. offer advice about 在……方面提供建议

3. have…(much, something, nothing, etc.)in common

6. enjoy the spirit of the holidays 享受节日氛围

10. as well as 也。。。

35. look into the eyes 直视（某人的）眼睛

37. a seven-day festival 一个七天的节日

2. a dark night in April 四月的一个黑夜

5. on one’s way to school 在某人上学的路上

6. something unusual happened 发生了异常的事

10. look older than one’s age 看上去比年龄大

11. ten years of hard work 十年的辛劳

12. only a small cold room to live in 只有寒舍一间

13. for the past ten years 在过去的十年里

14. in a government office 在政府部门

17. a man with a lot of money 有钱人

21. a lovely diamond necklace 可爱的钻石项链

23. look wonderful on sb. 戴在某人身上看上去很美

24. the last moment of happiness 最后的快乐时光

26. rush back to the palace 猛地跑回宫殿

35. play different roles 扮演不同的角色

36. lines written like a dialogue 写得像对话的台词

38. come up with a very good story 编成很好的故事

41. a thousand years from now 从现在起一千年

50. would rather do … 宁愿做……

1. each field of science 每一个科学领域

6. spent money (in) doing sth. 花钱做某事

10. advantages and disadvantages 利弊

16. conduct/do an experiment 做实验

21. add…to… 往…上添加…

22. tie … to… 把…绑在…

23. protect…from… 保护……以防……

34. have…in mind 心里想到……

35. allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事

37. a way of doing /to do sth. 做某事的方法

39. work on 做工作；从事…

40. There is no doubt that… 毫无疑问……

42. have no right to do sth. 无权做某事

49. fix…to… 把……固定在……

2. get along well (with sb) 相处得好

3. make an impression on sb 给某人留下印象

16. be thankful for 感谢……

24. be a good example for 成为某人的好榜样

41. at the opposite end of 在……对面

44. stand on one’s left leg 用左腿独立站好

48. the host of a talk show 脱口秀主持人

51. without a strong plan 没有详细的计划

52. always be the very best 总是做到最好

54. struggle to one’s knees 挣扎着站起来

55. on hands and knees 爬着，匍匐着, 伏在地上

英语站课件(篇8)

参考文献(即引文出处)的类型以单字母方式标识，具体如下： M――专著C――论文集N――报纸文章 J――期刊文章D――学位论文R――报告

对于不属于上述的文献类型，采用字母“Z”标识。对于英文参考文献，还应注意以下两点：

①作者姓名采用“姓在前名在后”原则，具体格式是：姓，名字的首字母.如：MalcolmRichardCowley应为：Cowley，M.R.，如果有两位作者，第一位作者方式不变，&之后第二位作者名字的首字母放在前面，姓放在后面，如：FrankNorris与IrvingGordon应为：Norris，F.&I.Gordon.;

②书名、报刊名使用斜体字，如：MasteringEnglishLiterature，EnglishWeekly。

[1]王海粟.浅议会计信息披露模式[J].财政研究，，21(1)：56-58. [2]夏鲁惠.高等学校毕业论文教学情况调研报告[J].高等理科教育，2004(1):46-52.

[3]Heider，E.R.&D.C.Oliver.Thestructureofcolorspaceinnamingandmemoryoftwolanguages[J].ForeignLanguageTeachingandResearch，，(3):62C67.

【格式】[序号]作者.书名[M].出版地：出版社，出版年份：起止页码. 【举例】[4]葛家澍，林志军.现代西方财务会计理论[M].厦门：厦门大学出版社，：42.

[5]Gill，R.MasteringEnglishLiterature[M].London:Macmillan，1985:42-45.

[6]李大伦.经济全球化的重要性[N].光明日报，-12-27(3).

[7]French，W.BetweenSilences:AVoicefromChina[N].AtlanticWeekly，198715(33).

[9]Spivak，G.“CantheSubalternSpeak?”[A].InC.Nelson&L.Grossberg(eds.).VictoryinLimbo:Imigism[C].Urbana:UniversityofIllinoisPress，1988，pp.271-313.

英语站课件(篇9)

教学目标：

1．运用多种方法认12个生字，掌握生词；

2．通过默读课文，知道课文大意；

1．学会本课12个生字和由这些字组成的新词，并了解它们在本课中的意思。

1、能借助拼音在语言环境中正确读写“丑、堆、孤、单、洁、越、冷、影”8个生字，认识两点水（冫）。积……

教学目标：

1、会认12个生字和由这些字组成的新词，会写10个生字。

2、能正确、流利地朗读课文，会背诵课……

教学目标：

1、会认6个生字，会写9个字。

2、正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文，能区别“常常”和“往常”的`意思……

天蓝蓝，海蓝蓝，我家住在大海边。

海边有个月亮湾，湾里有条打鱼船。

船上有位老爷爷，他的故事说不完。

……

教学目标：

1.正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2.学会本课10个生字，两条绿线内的6个字只识不写。理解由生字组……

1．能正确流利地朗读儿歌，读出儿歌的韵律美；

2．能根据形声字的构字特点分析、记忆字形，激发学生学习汉字的兴趣，……

英语站课件(篇10)

Lesson Plan Presentation

Reading Part in NSEFC Module 1 Unit1 Friendship——Anne’s Best Friend

Hello, everyone. I’m …. I’m very glad to be here to present my lesson plan. The lesson I’m going to talk about is the reading in NSEFC module 1 Unit1 Friendship. The title of the reading material is Anne’s Best Friend. I will present how to teach it and the reasons for doing so in the following aspects: the analyses of teaching material and learning condition, teaching objectives，the important and difficult points, teaching method, teaching procedures and blackboard notes.

First of all, I’d like to analyze the teaching material. The text is about the story of a Jewish girl who treated her diary as her best friend when she was hiding away from the Nazi during the Second World War. It mainly consists of two parts; the first part is the introduction of Anne and her diary named Kitty. The second part is a diary entry written by Anne in the form of letter addressed to Kitty. The text is a bit long and there are a lot of new words and expressions in it, especially in the letter.

Now, let’s move on to the analysis of learning conditions. The students are in grade1 in the senior school, they have achieved certain English level so they have no problem in comprehending the text and get the basic idea. They have learned the Second World War so their previous knowledge about it can lessen their difficulty of comprehension. But most of them maybe are not very familiar with the sufferings of the Jewish people during the war. I will introduce the related information rightly in the beginning of the lesson so as to prepare the students for the deep study of the text.

Based on the analyses of the teaching material and the learning condition, I’d like to propose the teaching objectives and the important and difficult points.

(1) language skill

Ss will improve their reading skills by training some of the reading skills, such as skimming, scanning. It is the important point of this lesson.

Ss will improve their writing skills by writing a letter to their friend. It is the difficult point of this lesson.

(2) language knowledge

Ss will master most of the new words and expressions in the text. This is the important point of this lesson.

Ss will know the direct speech and indirect speech.

(3) Affective objectives

Ss will have a deeper understanding of the friendship so they will cherish their friends more than ever before. Ss will realize the cruelty of the war and the importance of the peace.

(4) Culture awareness

Ss will know more about the Second World War, especially the persecution Jewish people suffered from the Nazi.

(5) Learning strategy

Ss will cultivate their ability of individual learning and cooperative learning.

As for the teaching methods, I mainly adopt audio-visual teaching method in the lead-in. During the reading process, I follow the top down modal to help the Ss to learn the text.

Now, here comes the most important part of my presentation—teaching procedures. I’ll finish the lesson in 4 steps within 45 minutes. They are:

Step1: Lead-in.

Step2:Pre-reading

Step3: While reading.

Step 4: Post-reading.

At the end of the lesson, I will present the homework.

Now, let me introduce them step by step in details.

The first step is lead-in. It will cost 7minutes. At the beginning of the lesson, I will play a short video clip which is about the sufferings of the Jewish people during the Second World War. From it, Ss will know that many Jewish people were caught and killed by Nazi in the camps, so others had to hide away. Then I will ask Ss what they needed most when in hiding. Ss may come up with the food, clothes and so on. I will give them some hint and they will realize that friends are also very important for them. Then it will be very natural for me to tell them than there was a girl called Anne who had a very good friend during the hard time. In this process, I will introduce them three new words, they are: German, Netherlands, go through. In this step, I adopt audio-visual teaching method, because the pictures and sounds serves better to activate the Ss. So I use the video to attract the Ss’ attention. What’s more, the introduction of Jewish people’s suffering by this video clip provides them with the background information of this text.

Then I will move on to the second step---pre-reading. It will only cost 3 minutes. The Ss are required to guess who Anne’s best friend is and what happened to them by looking at the title and the pictures. Then I will ask several Ss to say their predictions but I will not tell them the answer directly in this step. Although not all the Ss can get the right answer, their mind can get closer to the theme of the text by predicting. So, later, when they read the passage they will concentrate more on it to check their predictions.

After pre-reading, we will move on to the while-reading step which costs 22 minutes in total. There are 5 activities, the first three of which deals with the first two paragraphs of the text which is also the first part of the text. And the last two activities deal with the second part.

The first activity is skimming. Ss are expected to skim the first part of text to work out the main idea. But as there is no topic sentence in this part, it is a bit difficult for students to tell the main idea with their own words. So I will present a multiple choice which covers the main idea of the text for them to choose from. This reduces the difficulty of the task as well as the Ss’ anxiety.

After getting the main idea, we will do another activity, namely, scanning. Ss are expected to scan the text to find some specific information, such as the place and the time of the story, etc. Ss can develop the ability of information gathering and independent learning.

After skimming and scanning, we will do the third activity of this step---close reading. I will help Ss learn the passage paragraph by paragraph. For the first paragraph, I will ask some questions like “According to Anne, what kind of person should a true friend be?” The answer to these questions cannot be taken directly from the text. Ss need to reorganize the sentences. If they can answer these questions, it means they have understood this paragraph. Then we will learn the second paragraph. For this one, I will ask one question “What did Anne say about her diary?” Ss may answer it by the original words said by Anne, I will catch this opportunity to tell them they change the direct speech into the indirect speech. But I will not go deeper, because they will learn this language point next period, so a simple introduction is ok.

This is all for the first part of the text. Then we will start to learn the letter. There are two activities for this part. The first one is skimming，they should skim the letter for the main idea first and I will present a multiple choice for them to choose from. Them we will learn the letter in detail in the next activity. For the first paragraph of the letter, I will ask them to find out the changing of Anne’s attitudes toward nature. Ss can find out that before hiding away, she paid no attention to the nature while she grew crazy about it when hiding. Then I will ask them to find out the reason. As for the second paragraph, Anne narrates two experiences of longing to get close to nature. So firstly, I will ask them to pick out the time of the experience and then we will study her feelings in the process. Of cause, we will learn some new word here, such as on purpose, at dusk and so on.

After the while-reading, comes the post-reading step. It will cost 12 minutes. In this step, I will firstly ask Ss if they have to go into hiding like Anne and her family, what they would like to say to their friends. Ss will talk in groups of four and share their ideas with each other. During the discussion, the Ss will be stimulated and also know the importance of friendship. It servers to make the Ss be prepared for the next activity---writing. After the discussion, the Ss shall write a letter to their friends individually. As they have talked about what they want to say to their friends, the difficulty of the writing is lowered because they have something to say. Ss are expected to write just a draft, for the time is limited.

Lastly, I will give Ss the homework. It will only cost one minute. Ss should not only review the new words and expressions of the text, but also polish their letter after class.

That’s all for the teaching procedure. And here is my blackboard note. On the right side, there are the words and expressions. In the middle, there are some points of the comprehension of the text.

That all for my lesson plan presentation thanks for your attention.

Blackboard notes:

Unit 1. Anne’s Best Friend

幻灯片投影布 Before: paid no attention to it

reasons

While: go crazy about it

German

Netherland

Go through

Set down

A series of

英语站课件(篇11)

主题：中英文课件

随着全球化的发展，英语已经成为一种全球性语言。而且，学习英语不仅仅是为了更好地和英语国家的人交流，也是为了更好地拓展自己的知识领域。随着科技的发展，中英文课件也越来越受到人们的欢迎。

中英文课件的优势

中英文课件的优势主要体现在以下几个方面：

1. 提高学习成效。中英文课件通常采用图形、动画、声音等多种手段，使学习过程更加生动、直观、易于理解，有利于激发学习者的兴趣，从而提高学习的效果。

2. 降低学习难度。中英文课件不仅可以从视觉和听觉两个方面来提供信息，而且可以采用图示、图片、动画等方式，帮助学习者更好地理解学习内容，从而降低学习难度。

3. 提高教学质量。中英文课件的使用，可以使教学更加灵活多样，更具交互性，有利于激发学生学习兴趣，培养学生自主学习的能力，提高教学质量。

中英文课件的设计要点

要设计一份有趣、生动、直观的中英文课件，需要注意以下几个方面：

1. 借助图形传递信息。中英文课件的设计必须要有足够的图形，通过图片、动画等视觉资源让学生更加直观地了解和理解学习内容。

2. 结构清晰。中英文课件的结构要清晰，将课程分成若干部分，每部分都应有一个明确的标题和导航栏，使学生可以方便地查找所需内容。

3. 内容充实。中英文课件的内容要充实，既要学生姓名，还要包含其他方面的信息，如课程大体框架、日程安排、教学要求等。

4. 合理运用声音。声音可以很好地帮助学生理解学习内容，中英文课件设计者可以在课件中适当使用语音、音效和音乐。

中英文课件在教学中的应用

中英文课件不仅可以用来独立学习，还可以在教学中起着重要的作用。在教学中，中英文课件可以帮助老师准备课堂教学内容，也可以辅助老师进行课堂教学，提高学生的学习效率和学习兴趣。

在英语教学中，中英文课件显得格外重要。通过中英文课件，学生可以更好地了解其它国家的文化、经济、政治等方面的信息，而教师则可以更好地传递知识，激发学生学习兴趣和动力。

总的来说，中英文课件是现代教育不可或缺的一部分。设计好的中英文课件可以帮助学习者更好地理解和掌握学习内容，提高学习效率和质量，帮助教师进行教学，更好地达到教学目的。

英语站课件(篇12)

主题：跨文化沟通

中文课件：

跨文化沟通的意义和挑战

随着经济全球化的发展，跨文化沟通成为越来越重要的技能。对于那些想要在国际舞台上立足的人们来说，了解并掌握跨文化沟通技巧将变得越来越关键。但是，跨文化沟通并不容易，由此带来了许多挑战。本课件将讨论跨文化沟通的意义和挑战。

跨文化沟通的意义

跨文化沟通的意义在于，在不同文化间建立沟通和理解，这是人际交往的基础之一。跨文化沟通不仅可以加强人们之间的联系，还可以促进交流和合作，使人们更好地理解、尊重和欣赏彼此的文化。

此外，跨文化沟通还可以帮助人们更好地应对全球化带来的挑战。在现代社会中，越来越多的人需要在不同的文化环境中生活和工作。跨文化沟通技能可以帮助他们更好地适应新的文化环境，并借此提高自己的竞争力。

跨文化沟通的挑战

虽然跨文化沟通的意义重大，但它也面临着许多挑战。

一方面，不同文化间存在显著差异。这些差异不仅体现在沟通方式、语言和礼仪上，还涉及信仰、态度和价值观等方面。因此，当人们试图在不同的文化环境中进行交流时，可能会遇到许多困难和误解。

另一方面，文化间的差异可能会导致文化冲突。这些冲突可能会加剧误解和隔阂，从而妨碍跨文化沟通的进行。

再加上现代交通和通讯手段的发展，人们不得不逐渐与不同国家、不同文化的人们交往，以应对全球化时代的挑战。

结语

跨文化沟通是全球化时代人们必备的技能，它可以促进交流和合作，帮助人们更好地适应新的文化环境。但是，跨文化沟通也面临许多挑战，需要人们不断学习和实践，才能够提高跨文化沟通的有效性。

英语站课件(篇13)

Reading Around the world in eight hours

Good afternoon, everyone. Now I’ll say junior Oxford English 8B Unit 3 Reading Part A. Around the World in Eight Hours. I’ll prepare to say the lesson from three parts.

Part One: Analysis of the Teaching Material

This is an important lesson in this book. Such a topic is related to daily life, so it is helpful to raise learning interests of students and it will be also helpful to improve their society sense. It can help students to attain “four skills” request of listening, speaking, reading and writing. Therefore this lesson is in the important position of the teaching material.

Most students are interested in computer games. So this topic can greatly attract their interests. It can accelerate them to learn English and geography well. After learning this lesson, they will know English and geography are as important as computer .Without much knowledge ,you won’t be able to learn computer well.

To understand the aim of an educational CD-ROM and what the character can do

To infer meaning from keywords, context and existing knowledge.

To master the Passive voice.

To develop the Ss’ abilities of listening, speaking, reading and writing.

To train the students how to use their own words to express their ideas.

(四)Teaching key and Difficult point

To review the Present perfect tense.

To learn the Passive voice.

To tell more about the CD-ROM.

To retell how the game is played

To understand the whole passage and answer teacher’s questions

2. Difficult points:

The Passive voice.

To retell how the game is played

Multi-media computer, Tape recorder, Software: PowerPoint and so on. They will be needed in this lesson.

1. Communicative teaching method

As we all know: the main instructional aims of learning English in the Middle School is to cultivate students’ abilities of listening, speaking, reading, writing and their good sense of the English language. So in this lesson I’ll mainly use “Communicative” teaching method, “Audio-visual” teaching method and “Task-based” teaching method.

To use these methods are helpful to develop the students’ abilities.

Arouse students’ interest by telling them that they are going to read about a new educational CD-ROM. Explain that the game is set in different countries and involves a tour around the world

Tell students that the first paragraph of the reading passage explains the background to the game .Listen to the tape. Ask some questions to check understanding, eg.

What’s the name of the new educational CD-ROM?

What can it help you to do?

Who is the designer?

Tell students that the second paragraph of the reading passage introduces the main character of the game . Ask some questions to check understanding, eg.

Who is the main character of the game?

How old is he?

What does he like doing?

What was he doing when he fell asleep?

Tell students that the third and fourth paragraphs of the reading passage, on page41, explain how the game is played. Ask them to read the rest of the reading passage on page 41

Ask some questions to check understanding, eg.

How can you earn a point?

What will happen if you have earned a point?

What will happen if you have earned enough points?

How many levels does the game have?

How long does it take you to finish the game?

What do the questions test?

What will you see on the screen when you reach a new place?

What can you learn about when you reach London?

What will you see when you passa level?

What happened to the places you have visited?

Read the whole passage and then ask some students to retell how the game is played(in 5steps)

1 See a golden cloud with instructions on it

2 See clouds with information about different places; See clouds with questions on them

3 Get a point every time you answer a question correctly

4 A cloud will come down and carry you off to a new place

5 See a world map. The old place is marked in bright purple

If possible, ask students to discuss what they have learned from the passage.(with their own words)

Step7 Use the following keywords to try to retell the passage.

Paragraph1.

a new educational CD-ROM, Around the world in Eight Hours.

Come out, interesting, at the same time, be designed by, the all-time favorite CD-ROM

Paragraph2.

Main character, love traveling, lie on the grass, fall asleep

Paragraph3.

be written on, different colors with questions on them

Every time you answer a question, earn enough points, come down, Carry off

Play the role of, take …an hour to finish, travel around, Test your knowledge of, a lot of useful information, for example

Be the best , get it in sold out

1 Translating the following phrases:

1)同时 2) 过一关

3) 扮演…角色 4) 光盘的设计者

5) 一直广受欢迎的'游戏 6) 得到足够的分数

7) 睡着 8) 英语语法和词汇

13) 掉下来 14) 售完

2 Try to recite the text.

1) The Present perfect tense. A new educational CD-ROM has just come out.

When you have earned enough points,….……..Carry you off to a place you have never visited before. The places you have visited are marked…

2) The Passive voice.

It is designed by Nancy Jackson. These words were written on it.

The places you have visited are marked in bright purple.

Get it now before it is sold out英语说课稿（英文版）

Reading Around the world in eight hours

Good afternoon, everyone. Now I’ll say junior Oxford English 8B Unit 3 Reading Part A. Around the World in Eight Hours. I’ll prepare to say the lesson from three parts.

Part One: Analysis of the Teaching Material

To understand the aim of an educational CD-ROM and what the character can do

To infer meaning from keywords, context and existing knowledge.

To master the Passive voice.

To develop the Ss’ abilities of listening, speaking, reading and writing.

To train the students how to use their own words to express their ideas.

(四)Teaching key and Difficult point

To review the Present perfect tense.

To learn the Passive voice.

To tell more about the CD-ROM.

To retell how the game is played

To understand the whole passage and answer teacher’s questions

2. Difficult points:

The Passive voice.

To retell how the game is played

Multi-media computer, Tape recorder, Software: PowerPoint and so on. They will be needed in this lesson.

1. Communicative teaching method

To use these methods are helpful to develop the students’ abilities.

Arouse students’ interest by telling them that they are going to read about a new educational CD-ROM. Explain that the game is set in different countries and involves a tour around the world

Tell students that the first paragraph of the reading passage explains the background to the game .Listen to the tape. Ask some questions to check understanding, eg.

What’s the name of the new educational CD-ROM?

What can it help you to do?

Who is the designer?

Tell students that the second paragraph of the reading passage introduces the main character of the game . Ask some questions to check understanding, eg.

Who is the main character of the game?

How old is he?

What does he like doing?

What was he doing when he fell asleep?

Tell students that the third and fourth paragraphs of the reading passage, on page41, explain how the game is played. Ask them to read the rest of the reading passage on page 41

Ask some questions to check understanding, eg.

How can you earn a point?

What will happen if you have earned a point?

What will happen if you have earned enough points?

How many levels does the game have?

How long does it take you to finish the game?

What do the questions test?

What will you see on the screen when you reach a new place?

What can you learn about when you reach London?

What will you see when you passa level?

What happened to the places you have visited?

Read the whole passage and then ask some students to retell how the game is played(in 5steps)

1 See a golden cloud with instructions on it

2 See clouds with information about different places; See clouds with questions on them

3 Get a point every time you answer a question correctly

4 A cloud will come down and carry you off to a new place

5 See a world map. The old place is marked in bright purple

If possible, ask students to discuss what they have learned from the passage.(with their own words)

Step7 Use the following keywords to try to retell the passage.

Paragraph1.

a new educational CD-ROM, Around the world in Eight Hours.

Come out, interesting, at the same time, be designed by, the all-time favorite CD-ROM

Paragraph2.

Main character, love traveling, lie on the grass, fall asleep

Paragraph3.

be written on, different colors with questions on them

Every time you answer a question, earn enough points, come down, Carry off

Play the role of, take …an hour to finish, travel around, Test your knowledge of, a lot of useful information, for example

Be the best , get it in sold out

1 Translating the following phrases:

1)同时 2) 过一关

3) 扮演…角色 4) 光盘的设计者

7) 睡着 8) 英语语法和词汇

13) 掉下来 14) 售完

2 Try to recite the text.

1) The Present perfect tense. A new educational CD-ROM has just come out.

When you have earned enough points,….……..Carry you off to a place you have never visited before. The places you have visited are marked…

2) The Passive voice.

It is designed by Nancy Jackson. These words were written on it.

The places you have visited are marked in bright purple.

Get it now before it is sold out

英语站课件(篇14)

Hello, dear teachers,

My name is . I’m very glad to be here to share some of my teaching ideas. Today my topic is the greeting and self-introduction in PEP primary English book3 Unit 1 Part A Let’s talk. I divide my lesson into 6 parts as follows: teaching material, teaching aims, difficult and key points, teaching methods, teaching procedures and blackboard designing.

Part1. My understanding of teaching material

This unit discusses about the self-introduction and greetings. And this lesson is the first one of this unit. It requires Ss to introduce themselves and greet others when two meet. It is a hot daily talk, so the Ss will be interested in this new lesson.

Part2. Teaching aims

Now , I will talk about the teaching aims .

First, the basic knowledge aim is enable students to use and master the sentence structures: Hello. / Hi. I’m…

Second, the ability aim is to develop Ss basic ability of listening and speaking, and enable Ss to communicate with their partners with sentence form in a real situation .

Third, the emotion aim is to develop Ss’ consciousness of cooperation and competition and improve their interest of learning English.

Part 3. Difficult and key points :

Thirdly, I’d like to talk about the difficult and key points . The key point is that students can read and use the key sentences “I’m … / Hello. / Hi. ” in a real situation such as greeting people around them.

The predicted point is the whole expression of self-introduction with “I’m…”

Part4. Teaching methods :

I’d like to analyze Ss and show you my teaching methods.

In our school, Grade 1 is the first year to learn English. Ss are very curious about English. They’re active and competitive. Also, they are good at imitating. But, their attention can’t be kept long. So it requires us to use attractive teaching manners to hold Ss’ attention. Based on such a situation, I mainly use the task-based method,

I’ve prepared activities such as TPR, singing, games, etc. I also arrange individual work, pair work and group work for Ss to practice. Besides, praise is very important. When they have a chance to speak, and have done a good job, they can get a star or something like that on their books. It’s very important to keep Ss’ interests.

Part5、Teaching procedure :

I’ll finish this lesson in five steps.

Step 1. Warm-up

1. Enjoy a song “Hello”

T: Hello, class. I’m Miss Xiao. You can call me “Miss Xiao”.(我叫肖老师，以后你们就可以叫我Miss Xiao)

S: Hello, Miss Xiao.

2. Free talk

Present a picture of the members in Cartoon Xi Yangyang and Hui Tailang. Ask Ss to tell the names one by one.

T: Hello, boys and girls. Look, who are they?

S: Xi Yangyang/ Mei Yangyang/…

T: Do you like them? I like Mei Yangyang very much. Now, I’ll say hello to Mei Yangyang. Hello, Mei Yangyang. 小朋友们，跟你们最喜欢的羊打招呼吧！

S: I like…

Purpose: Singing can easily take Ss into a free English environment. With the help of CAI, to present cartoon characters. Set a situation to help Ss say hello.

Step2. Presentation

1. Say hello to teacher

T: 小朋友，还记得老师的名字吗？接下来，老师要跟你们打招呼了。我们来比赛，看哪组小朋友已经最快记住老师的名字了？ Hello/ Hi, Group 1. (分别跟四大组打招呼)

G1: Hello, Miss Xiao.

T: Very good. (竖起大拇指)

a. Pair work: say hello to your partners.

A: Hello/ Hi,... B: Hello/ Hi, …

b. Teach: I’m…

（1）. T: Hello, I’m Miss Xiao. What about you? (Point to S’ ID card)

S: Xiao Ming.

T: Hello, Xiao Ming.

S: Hello, Miss Xiao.

T: I’m Miss Xiao. You can say “I’m Xiao Ming”.

Ask S to say it again and walk to other Ss and greet in the same way.

（2）. Group work

Introduce themselves in a group of four.

Purpose: To present the key structures one by one is much easier for the Ss to learn and grasp the meanings. Proper competition can arouse the Ss’ interest in English learning.

Step 3. Practice

1. Looking for friends

Divide the whole class into 4 groups. Each student can leave their seats and make new friends with “Hello, I’m…” and remembers their names. Let’s say who has the most friends.

2. Get-on

Invite your new friends to your bus.

S1: Hello, S2.

S2: Hello, S1.

S1: Hello, S3.

S3: Hello, S1.

Purpose: Task-based teaching method is used here to develop Ss’ ability of communication and also their ability of co-operation will be well trained. Games can also improve Ss’ interest.

Step 4 Homework

Say hello to your parents and friends and introduce yourself.

Purpose: Revision is so important that Ss should speak English as much as they as in class or after class. It is necessary for the Ss to do some extensive exercises after class to consolidate the knowledge they learned.

Part 6 . Blackboard design

Unit1 Hello! A Let’s talk

Hello. / Hi.

Hello, I’m Miss Xiao/…

My lesson is over. Thanks.

扩展阅读

2023高三英语复习课件14篇

每位老师都需要教案课件，因此老师最好认真撰写完善的教案。教案是创造课堂情境教学的关键途径。希望这篇"高三英语复习课件"能为您的教学和学习提供指引，同时也希望大家喜欢本文！

高三英语复习课件【篇1】

近几年的NMET的阅读理解考项中总有一些考题要测试考生根据上下文和构词法知识猜出生词词义或旧词具有新意的能力。例如：

1. Which of the following words can take the place of the word “career” in the first paragraph ? (92)

2. The word “he” in the last sentence refers to ______.[NMET92 80]

3. The word “yielded” in the last sentence means _______. [NMET93 73]

4. The underlined phrase “make out” in the first paragraph means ______. [NMET94 70]

5. The underlined words “geothermal energy” in the third paragraph mean ___. [NMET94 78]

6. The underlined word “family” in the second paragraph means _____. [NMET95 71]

7. The underlined word “they” in the last sentence of the first paragraph refers to ____ [NMET96 59]

8. The underlined word “leg” in “Bicycle tour and race” probably means _____. [NMET96 68]

9. The underlined phrase “figure out” in the text means _____. [NMET97 54]

10. The underlined word “one” refers to _____. [NMET97 68]

11. “Act your age” means people should _____. [NMET97 69]

12. The words “Youth Summit” refer to ______. [NMET98 55]

13. When the writer says “Dick Spivak is just an ordinary man”, he means _____. [NMET98 58]

14. What did Cory Luxmoore mean when he said “I'm on high”? [NMET99 55]

15. The underlined word “it” in the second paragraph refers to the idea that Computertowns (99)

16.“Professional work” used in the text means _______. [NMET99 69]

17. Which of the following can be used in place of “Quite the reverse”?[NMET 61]

18. Spundels and ballalators are used in the text to refer to _________.[NMET2000 65]

由此可见，高考对考生推测词义的能力是非常重视的。这就要求我们在阅读时要通过上下文交代的内容做出合乎逻辑的推理。在必要时，做些语法分析，通过词与词的关系，确定其词性；有时根据常识和生活经验或构词法知识，完全可以对那些从未见过的生词的词义做出正确的推测。

一般说来，这种题型的题干部分总含有mean, refer to的字样。做这种题时，特别要注意的是，对于那些我们熟悉的词千万不要妄自、草率下结论，一定要结合上下文判断它在文中的意思。例如95年的71题：The underlined word “family” in the second paragraph means _____.

A. home B. children C. wife and husband D. wife and children

“family”是我们很熟悉的词了，意为“家庭”，但以这个意思理解family的话，我们就无法选择答案了。但是，如果我们结合上下文“The baker, with his wife and family, was able to get out through a window in the roof.”就很容易看出family其实指的是“children子女”，所以答案应该是B。

因此，考生不仅要知道常用词的意思，更要知道其灵活变化的意思。在阅读理解测试中，常见的考查这种技能的题型有：

1． The word “...” in line ... most nearly means _____.

2． The word “...” in line ... probably means _____.

3． In line ..., the word “...” refers to _____.

4． In line ..., the word “...” could best be replaced by which of the following?

5． The word “...” as used in line ... in this passage means _____.

6． The word “...” as used in line ... is closest in meaning to ____.

7． In line ..., “...” could properly be replaced by ____.

8． By “...”, the author means _____.

In America, where labor costs are so high, “do-it-yourself” is a way of life. Many people repair their own cars, build their own garages, even remodel their own houses. Soon they may also be writing their own books. In Hollywood there is a company that publishes children's books with the help of computers. Although other book companies also publish that way, this particular company is very unusual.It “personalizes” the books by having computer make the reader the leading character in the story. Here is how they do it. Let us say your child is named Jenny. She lives on Oak Drive in St. Louis, has a dog named Spot, a cat named Tabby, and three playmates whose names are Betsy, Sandy, and Jody. The computer uses this information to fill out a story that has already been prepared and illustrated（配上插图）. The story is then printed with standard equipment as a hard- cover book. A child who receives such a book might say, “This book is about me.” Therefore the company calls itself the “Me- Books Publishing Company”. Children like the me- books because they like to see in print their own names and the namesof their friends and pets. But more important, “personalization” had been found to be an important tool in developing enthusiasm for reading.

Question: Here “fill out a story” means ______.

A. complete a story B. make full a story

C. tell a story D. invent a story

We walked in so quietly that the nurse at the desk didn't even lift her eyes from the book. Mum pointed at a big chair by the door and I knew she wanted me to sit down. While I watched mouth open is surprise, Mum took off her hat and coat and gave them to me to hold. She walked quietly to the small room by the lift and took out a wet mop. She pushed the mop past the desk and as the nurse looked up, Mum nodded and said, “Very dirty floors. ”

“Yes, I'm glad they've finally decided to clean them, ”the nurse answered. She looked at Mum strangely and said, “But aren't you working late?”

Mum just pushed harder, each swipe(拖一下)of the mop taking her farther and farther down the

hall. I watched until she was out of sight and the nurse had turned back to writing in the big book.

After a long time Mum came back. Her eyes were shining. She quickly put the mop back and took

my hand. As we turned to go out of the door, Mum bowed politely to the nurse and said, “Thank you.”

Outside, Mum told me, “Dagmar is fine. No fever. ”

“You saw her, Mum?”

“Of course. I told her about the hospital rules, and she will not expect us until tomorrow. Dad will

stop worrying as well. It's a fine hospital. But such floors! A mop is no good. You need a brush.”

51. When she took a mop from the small room what Mum really wanted to do was .

A. to clean the floor B. to please the nurse

B. to see a patient D. to surprise the story-teller

52. When the nurse talked to Mum she thought Mum was a .

53. After reading the story what can we infer about the hospital?

A. It is a children's hospital.

B. It has strict rules about visiting hours.

C. The conditions there aren't very good.

D. The nurses and doctors there don't work hard.

54. From the text we know that Dagmar is most likely

A. the story-teller's sister B. Mum's friend

C. the story-teller's classmate D. Dad's boss

55. Which of the following words best describes Mum?

When you want to see if a library has the book you want, you can use the catalogue(目录)in the

library. Most catalogues of books in a library take the form of small cards kept in boxes. One way of arranging(排列)the cards is in ABC order by the family names of the writers.

Catalogue cards usually give the following important information:(1)the name of the writer, (2)the

shelf-mark(架号), that is, the Dewey number which helps people to find where the books are, (3)the title of the book, (4)the year of publication and the publisher, and (5) the number of pages in the book.

56. If you know the title of a book and want to find out if it is in the catalogue, what else do you need to

know?

A. The shelf-mark. B. The name of the writer.

C. The Dewey number. D. The year of publication.

57. Which of the following is the kind of catalogue card described in the text?

Most animals have little connection with animals of a different kind, unless they hunt them for

food. Sometimes, however, two kinds of animals come together in a partnership(伙伴关系)which does good to both of them. You may have noticed some birds sitting on the backs of sheep. This is not because they want a ride, but because they find easy food in the parasites (寄生虫)on sheep. The sheep allow the birds to do so because they remove the cause of discomfort. So although they can manage without each other, they do better together.

Sometimes an animal has a plant partner. The relationship develops until the two partners cannot

manage without each other. This is so in the corals(珊瑚)of the sea. In their skins they have tiny plants which act as “dustman”, taking some of the waste products from the corals and giving in return oxygen which the animal needs to breathe. If the plants are killed, or are even prevented from light so that they cannot live normally, the corals will die.

58. Some birds like to sit on a sheep because .

B. they depend on the sheep for existence

C. they enjoy travelling with the sheep

D. they find the position most comfortable

59. The underlined word “they” in the last sentence of the first paragraph refers to.

A. birds and parasites B. birds and sheep

C. parasites and sheep D. sheep, birds and parasites

60. It can be learnt from the text that the coral depends on the plant for .

61. What does the second paragraph mainly discuss?

A. Some animals and plants depend on each other for existence.

B. Some animals and plants develop their relationship easily.

C. Some plants depend on each other for food.

D. Some animals live better together.

In the 19th century England people liked to go to the seaside. In those days, ladies wore long

bathing dresses, and men wore bathing suits. Women did not walk about on the beach(沙滩) in their bathing dresses. They hired a bathing machine. A bathing machine was used for changing in, and for taking the bather down to the sea. It cost 2 pence(便士) to hire a machine and an attendant(侍者). When she had paid, the bather climbed up the back steps and got into the bathing machine. Then she changed into her bathing dress. When she had changed, the machine was pulled down to the sea. The bathing machine stopped in the water and the bather went down the front steps into the water. If she did not want to get into the sea, the attendant pulled her in.

62. A 19th century English lady bathing in the sea would wear something like:

63. Who used the bathing machine?

A. Women bathers.

B. Both men and women bathers.

C. Bathers who couldn't swim.

D. Bathers who couldn't walk.

64. A bathing machine was mainly used for .

A. giving the bather a pleasure ride on the beach

B. giving the bather some exercise before getting into the water

C. protecting the bather from catching cold from the sea wind

D. protecting the bather from being seen in a bathing dress out of water

65. In 19th century people who used the bathing machine usually did the following things. Which is

the right order for doing them?

a. Changing into bathing clothes b. Getting out of the bathing machine

c. Paying 2 pence d. Getting into the bathing machine

e. Being taken down the beach f. Getting into the water

A. e, d, a, b, f, c B. c, d, a, e, b, f

C. c, d, e, a, b, f C. d, a, e, b, f, c

A bike tour and race will be held on August 26 and 27(Sat. & Sum. ). At 5:30am, the riders will

leave Tian'anmen Square and ride the first 35 kilometres as a training leg. Then the next 55 kilometre leg, from Yanjiao to Jixian, will be the first competitive(竞争性的)part of the tour. The riders and their bikes will then be taken from Jixian to Changli.

The second racing leg of the tour will be from Changli to the seaside of Nandaibe, covering a

distance of 20 kilometres. Saturday night includes the stay at Nandaihe and supper. Sunday morning is free for play at the seaside. At noon all the people and their bikes will be taken back to Beijing.

The Brazilian Football Club will play Beijing Guo'an Team at the Workers Stadium on August 26.

The club has four national team players . Also coming is 1994 US World Cup star Romario who has promised to play for at least 45 minutes.

Time/Date:4:30 pm, August 26(Sat. ) Telephone:5012372

The Third National Rock Climbing Competition will be held on August 26-27 at the Huairou

Mountain-climbing Training Base. More than 10 teams from Beijing, Wuhan, Dalian, Jilin and other places will take part in it. A Japanese team will give an exhibition climbing. Free for spectators(观众).

Take a long-distance bus from Dongzhimen to Huairou.

Time/Dates:9-12 am, August 26 and 27

Telephone:7143177, 7144850, Wang Zhenghua

66. The main purpose of announcing the above events is to give information about .

A. visiting teams B. famous players

C. things to do for the weekend D. prices to pay for the sports events

67. If you take part in the bike tour, you will ride for .

A. 35 kilometres B. 55 kilometres

C. 75 kilometres D. 110 kilometres

68. the underlined word “leg” in “Bicycle tour and race” probably means .

C. part of the training D. part of the tour

69. What is special about the rock climbing competition?

A. A foreign team takes part in it.

B. You can watch it without paying.

C. You don't have to be a sportsman to take part.

D. The bus trip to the place of the competition is free.

70. If you want to find something to do for Saturday afternoon, which telephone number will you call?

Building a house costs quite a lot of money. Suppose you plan to build a house. Your first step will be to find a right piece of land. Your choice will depend on many different things. You will probably try to find a sunny place, with pleasant surroundings（环境）near shops and bus stops, not too far from your friends and the place where you work.

Next you will find an excellent builder, and together with the builder you will work out a plan. The builder will draw the plan. It will show the number of rooms, their position and size, and other parts which must be noticed, such as windows, doors, and electric outlets. The builder will work out how much money is needed to build your house. He will work out the cost of the wood, bricks, the glass, and everything else that must be used in building the house. Later on, when he starts to build, this estimate（预算）must be corrected and revised（修正. His estimate is based on existing prices, but prices of such things may change, and many other things may happen between the time when he makes the estimate and the time when he builds the house.

When the builder gives his estimate, you may wish to change your plan. (You may also wish to change your builder, if his estimate is too high!) You may find that some of the features（特征）you wanted as first cost too much, or that you can spend a little more and add something to your plan. The builder's estimate depends on the plan, but the final plan depends on the builder's estimate.

1． The best title of this passage is _____.

A. Building a House Costs Much Money

2． The first thing for a person to build a house is _____.

A. to get as much money as possible

B. to find a suitable piece of land

3． After choosing the best place to build the house, the following things for a person to build

a house are to _______.

B. find an excellent builder and work out a plan

4． The phrase（短语）“draw a plan” in this passage means _______.

A. making a picture of a building or a room

D. pulling a picture out of a room

5． When the builder starts to build a house, his estimate will have to be corrected and revised because __

A. it is wrongly worked out by a workman

B. the future owner of the house thinks the estimate is so high that he cannot afford the building

C. the prices of building materials and the expenses(费用) of labor may be different from

the original prices and expenses

D. estimates are usually mistaken in the beginning

6． What is the relationship（关系）between the estimate and the plan?

A. The plan depends on the estimate.

B. The estimate depends on the plan.

C. The plan has nothing to do with the estimate.

D. The estimate and the plan depend on each other

猜测词义的能力不光在考试时很重要，就连我们平时阅读英语文章时也很用得着哦。就象我

们在看中文的文章时，并不是一碰到生词就去查字典，而是根据语境去猜测生词的。我们读英语文章时，也应养成这样的习惯和能力。

要想提高猜测词义的能力，我们可从以下七个方法下意识地进行阅读。

在be，be called，call等判断词出现的判断句中，可根据已知部分，猜测生词的含义。如：

1）A mosquito is a small flying pest that thrust the skin and then drink blood.

2）A person who is skilled at making or repairing wooden objects is called a carpenter.

你能猜出斜体部分单词的意思吗？mosquito是“蚊子”，carpenter是“木匠”。不难吧？

有时，我们还可根据定语从句或同位语对其修饰的先行词的词义做出推测。例如：

His uncle is a zoologist, an expert who does research on animals. 不难猜出，zoologist动物学家”

当看到文中的破折号“-”时，我们也应该留点神，因为它也可引出起解释说明作用的同位语或具有同义的短语或从句。如： Some organizations of United Nations prefer to take on Polyglots as their workers-those who can understand as well as speak many languages. 这里，Polyglot指的是“懂而且会说多种语言的人”。

在but，however，yet，otherwise，though这些表示意义转折的连词出现的句子中，其前后的词有明显的对比关系。根据已知的内容，通过这种对比关系，就很容易猜出生词的词义了。如：

1）Though Tom's face has been washed quite clean, his neck still remains grubby. grubby是什么意思呢？和clean相对，便是“肮脏的”了。

2）John usually wastes a lot of money on such useless things；his wife, however, is very thrifty.

和wastes a lot of money相对比，thrifty就是“节俭的”意思。

because，since与as是连结原因状语从句的从属连词，so是连结表示结果的并列句的连词，so...that与such...that中的that是连结结果状语从句的。当这些信息词出现在有生词的句中，通过因果关系，依据已知部分，就能猜出生词的词义。例如：

1） She wanted the hairdresser to trim her hair a bit because it was too long. 根据后边的原因，我们就可推测出trim就是“修剪”的意思。right? Ok, it's your turn.看看你能否正确猜出下句中斜体词的意思。

2） The river is so turbid that it is impossible to see the bottom even when it is shallow.

根据that引导的结果状语从句，可以猜出，turbid的意思是“浑浊的”。你猜对了吗？

运用逻辑推理能力，自身的生活经验及生活常识，根据上下文能读懂的部分，可以正确猜出词义。下面文字中斜体单词的词义你能猜出来吗？

1） Birds fly with their wings, and they pick up their foods, and then eat them with their beaks and they use their claws for tearing, seizing, pulling or holding objects.

2）Most of the roses are beginning to wither because of the cold. 句子的已知部分和我们的常识告诉我们： wings是“翅膀”；beaks是“喙”；claws是“爪子”；wither表示“枯萎”。

同等关系，指的是一个词，一组词或短语在句中作同一成分，而且它们的词义都属于同一范畴。明显的标志是，这样的词组或短语中间常常用并列连词and或or来连接。例如：

1） At forty-two he was in his prime and always full of energy.

2） Are people born intelligent or stupid?

你能根据同等关系猜出斜体词的意思吗？从“年龄42岁”以及与prime具有同等关系的full of energy，可以猜出prime的意思是“盛年时期”。从选择连词or“还是”以及与intelligent处于同等位置的stupid“愚蠢的”可以猜测intelligent是“聪明的”意思。

如：You can take any of the periodicals: The World of English, Foreign Language Teaching in Schools, or English Learning. 从后面列举的例子可以猜出periodical是“期刊，杂志”的意思。

根据学过的构词法知识，知道词根和前缀或后缀的意义，就可猜出由它们组成的新词词义。

如： The colors of Hawaii in summer are unforgettable. 根据构词法和我们已熟悉的词forget，我们可以知道unforgettable就是“令人难忘的”意思。

1． Archaeology is the study of the buried remains of ancient times, such as houses, pots, tools and

weapons. A. 地理学 B. 生态学 C. 心理学 D. 考古学

2． This strict officer is a martinet, a person who demands total obedience（服从）to rules, discipline

and orders.

A. 专制的人 B. 软弱的人 C. 强硬的人 D. 要求严格服从纪律和命令的人

3． Though Mr. Smith has been general manager for just 3 months, he has already made much

greater achievements than his predecessors.

4． The football game was getting more and more exciting, however, the old lady was still as dozy

as she usually was.

A. 昏昏欲睡的B. 亢奋的 C. 欣喜若狂的 D. 麻木的

5． All his attempts to unlock the door was futile, because he was using the wrong key.

6． She did not hear what you said because she was completely engrossed in her reading.

A. 心不在焉的B. 紧张的 C. 全神贯注的 D. 睡意浓的

7． One of symptoms caused by the peculiar illness is a high fever.

8． In the strong wind, the beggar shivered with the terrible cold.

9． The hot tropical weather created a feeling of lassitude and encouraged laziness.

10．To quite a great many people, money is an irresistible temptation（诱惑）.

A. 不可抗拒的 B. 可抗拒的 C. 接受的 D. 不可接受的

JINTAN, JIANGSU: The 20 students - 18 boys and 2 girls -had a thousand reasons to be proud of themselves. They had just climbed their way to the top rung（阶梯）out of 4 million students taking part in the Fifth National Hua Luogeng Gold Cup Mathematics Contest（竞赛）on Tuesday evening.

The 20 gold medal winners are all primary and middle school students under the age of 14.

‘Many of the problems are of college level and these pupils can figure them out. It is just unbelievable!’said a teacher from Guangdong province.

Named after China's most famous mathematician, Hua Luogeng, the contest started in 1986, one year after his death. In less than 10 years, it has been recognised by the State Education Commission（国家教委） as the country's biggest and best contest of its kind.

51. This news story is mainly about .

C. the 20 pupils who have won gold medals in the contest

D. the 5th National Hua Luogeng Gold Cup Mathematics Contest

52. This news story most probably appeared in a newspaper in .

53. It can be inferred from the text that the teacher from Guangdong province .

A. felt proud of the gold medal winners

B. wondered if the students were honest

C. thought that the problems were too difficult for the students

D. believed that the twenty winners could go to study at university

54. The underlined phrase ‘figure out’ in the text means .

In the 1930s, a lot of people in the USA were out of work. Among these people was a man named

Alfred Butts. He always had an interest in word games and so, to fill his time, he planned a game which he called ‘Lexico’. However, he was not completely satisfied with the game, so he made a number of changes to it and, in time, changed its name from ‘Lexico’to ‘Alph’ and then to ‘Criss Cross’. He wanted to make some money from his new game but he didn't have any real commercial（商业性的）success.

In 1939, Butts happened to meet a man called Jim Brunot who showed an interest in the new game.

The two men worked together on developing the game and in 1948 it was offered for sale in the United States under its new name - ‘Scrabble’.

At first, it didn't sell very well. In the first year it sold just 2,250 sets and by 1951 it had only

reached 8,500 sets a year.

Then, in 1952 the manager of Macy's department store in New York, Jack Strauss, happened to

play ‘Scrabble’while he was on holiday. He thought it was a wonderful game and, when he went back to work after his holiday, he insisted that Macy's should stock（储备） the game and make an effort （努力） to call the public's attention to it.

As a result,‘scrabble’became a big success in the United States and it soon spread to Australia and

then to other English-speaking countries.

55. The text is mainly about .

56. Alfred Butts invented the game‘Lexico’ .

C. when he was out of work and looking for a job

D. when he was playing word games to pass the time

57. Who made ‘Scrabble’ popular?

A. Alfred Butts.

B. Jack Strauss.

C. Alfred Butts and Jim Brunot.

D. Jack Strauss and Jim Brunot.

58. When did Alfred Butts first put his game on the market?

A. In 1939.

B. In 1948.

C. Before 1939.

D. Between 1939 and 1948.

Allan goes everywhere with Birgitta Anderson, a 54-year-old secretary. He moves around her

office at work and goes shopping with her.‘Most people don't seem to mind Allan,’ says Birgitta, who thinks he is wonderful. ‘He's my fourth child,’ she says. She may think of him and treat him that way, buying his food, paying his health bills and his taxes, but in fact Allan is a dog.

Birgitta and Allan live in Sweden, a country where everyone is expected to lead an orderly life

according to rules laid down by the government, which also provides （提供）a high level of care for its people. This level of care costs money.

People in Sweden pay taxes on everything, so aren't surprised to find that owning a dog means yet

more taxes. Some people are paying as much as 500 Swedish kronor in taxes a year for the right to keep their dog, money that is spent by the government on dog hospitals and sometimes medical treatment for a dog that falls ill. However, most such treatment is expensive, so owners often decide to pay health and even life insurance （保险）for their dog.

In Sweden dog owners must pay for any damage （损坏）their dog does. A Swedish Kennel Club

official explains what this means: if your dog runs out on the road and gets hit by a passing car you, as the owner, have to pay for any damage done to the car, even if your dog has been killed in the accident.

59. Birgitta pays taxes for Allan because .

A. he is her dog B. he is her child

C. he follows her everywhere D. he often falls ill

60. The money paid as dog taxes is used to .

A. keep a high level of care for the people

C. provide medical care for dogs

61. If a dog causes a car accident and gets killed, who should pay for the damage done to the car?

A. The owner of the car.

B. The owner of the dog.

C. The insurance company.

D. The government.

62. From the text it can be inferred that in Sweden .

A. dogs are welcome in public places

B. keeping dogs means asking for trouble

C. many car accidents are caused by dogs

Suppose you work in a big firm and find English very important for your job because you often

deal with foreign businessmen. Now you are looking for a place where you can improve your English, especially your spoken English.

Here are some advertisements about English language training from newspapers. You may find the

information you need.

63. You work from 9:00 am to 4:30 p.m. every day. Which schools will you choose?

A. Global English Centre and Modern Language School.

B. Global English Centre and the International House.

C. Modern Language School and the 21st Century.

D. The 21st Century and the International House.

64. The 21st Century is different from the other three schools in that .

A. its teaching quality is better

B. it is nearest to the city centre

C. its courses are more advanced

D. it requires an entrance examination

65. You will probably prefer to go to the International House because it .

A. offers free sightseeing and social activities

B. has a special course in spoken English

C. costs less than the other schools

66. If you take the evening programme at the International House, you will pay about .

America is growing older. Fifty years ago, only 4 out of every 100 people in the United States were

65 or older. Today, 10 out of every 100 Americans are over 65. The aging of the population will affect （影响） American society in many ways - education, medicine, and business. Quietly, the graying of America has made us a very different society - one in which people have a quite different idea of what kind of behavior （行为）is suitable （合适）at various ages.

A person's age no longer tells you anything about his/her social position, marriage or health.

There's no longer a particular year in which one goes to school or goes to work or gets married or starts a family. The social clock that kept us on time and told us when to go to school, get a job, or stop working isn't as strong as it used to be. It doesn't surprise us to hear of a 29-year-old university president or a 35-year-old grandmother, or a 70-year-old man who has become a father for the first time. Public ideas are changing.

Many people say, ‘I am much younger than my mother - or my father - was at my age.’

No one says ‘Act your age’ anymore. We've stopped looking with surprise at older people who act in youthful ways.

67. It can be learnt from the text that the aging of the population in America .

B. has changed people's social position

C. has changed people's understanding of age

D. has slowed down the country's social development

68. The underlined word ‘one’ refers to .

69. ‘Act your age’ means people should ______.

B. do the right thing at the right age

C. show respect for their parents young or old

D. take more physical exercise suitable to their age

70. If a 25-year-old man becomes general manager of a big firm, the writer of the text would most

probably consider it .

Confucius was born five hundred and fifty years before Christ. Unlike Jesus Christ, he did not bring words of God to the people. He was a clever teacher and a philosopher, looking for truth and wisdom. Most of his teaching was about life in this world.

Confucius was very keen to give people good rulers. Someone asked him, “What does a country need?” Confucius answered, “Enough food, a good army, and a good leader.” The people then asked, “Which one is the most important?” Confucius answered, “An army is not very important. All men must die, so food is not the most important. But if the leader of the country is not good, then everything will be bad.”

1. A philosopher is a person who ______.

B. teaches people how to live in this world

D. is more clever than most of other people

2. According to Confucius, the most important thing in any country was ____.

C. life of the people D. food

3. Jesus Christ _____.

A. was born more than half a century earlier than Confucius

B. taught people anything about God

C. did not tell people anything about God

D. was a philosopher sent by God

4. Confucius taught people all these things except _____.

B. the importance of the leader of the country

5. For Confucius a man _____.

B. would die if he didn't have a good ruler

C. was not important compared with food

D. ought to die if he considered food to be the most important for him

Learners of English, especially self-taught learners may have trouble in understanding speeches by native speakers. The following ways might help improve their listening ability.

First of all, do things step by step. It is not good to listen to something beyond your level. Better choose a suitable course and start with the first book. Go on to the second book only after you are sure you understand the first one.

Secondly, stick to one course of study. Don't change books often. Never let your attention be attracted by another course just because it seems to be more “fashionable”（时髦）.

Thirdly, listen to the English news program over the radio from time to time. Better go through the news stories in the Chinese-language newspaper first. That will make it easier for you to understand the English news on the radio.

Fourthly, if you have time, listen to some interesting stories in “Special English from the V.O.A. or other listening materials of the same level as that of your textbook.”

6. This is a piece of advice to learners of English on how to ____.

A. improve their listening ability

C. write better English and read faster

7. If you want to understand the English news program on the radio, you should _____.

A. read the Chinese-language newspaper step by step

B. read again and again the Chinese-language newspaper

C. go through the Chinese-language newspaper

D. be able to recite the Chinese-language newspaper

8. “Beyond your level” means something _____.

C. not too easy and not too difficult for you

9. The author advised that once you have taken up a course, you ____.

B. should begin with the last book

C. should take up other courses if they are more fashionable

10. In this passage, V.O.A. stands for _____.

高三英语复习课件【篇2】

I like cooking. ”

He likes cooking.

It' s not easy for me to learn English.

Seen from the space, the earth is a blue sphere.

以上英语句子中____________________等具有动词特征，但是在句子中不能作谓语的动词形式，就叫动词的非谓语形式，也叫非谓语动词。

非谓语动词是不随 _______________变化而变化的，它们不受人称和数的限定，所以又叫“非限定动词”。

动词的非谓语形式有三种：

（2）分词：studying (现在分词)、studied (过去分词)

动词非谓语形式有以下几种形式变化（以write为例）：

动名词可以起 ______词的作用，在句子中作主语，宾语，表语，定语。

动名词的否定形式是在前面加上not, never等否定词。

Fishing in this lake is forbidden.

Going abroad for a visit and settling down abroad are two different things.

My favorite hobby is fishing/collecting stamps.

My job is teaching.

注意：

在______________; ______________; __________ ; _______________ ; _________________ ;___________________ 等习惯表达中，

It为__________，而将做主语的动名词短语放在后面。例如：

It’s no use /good ringing her up now.

Is it worthwhile bargaining two hours for two cents?

It’s wise trying again.

It is of great importance fighting against pollution.

It is no use operating on the sick man. He should have been sent here early.

It is no good smoking; you’d better give it up.

（二）动名词短语作___________________。

He avoided giving me a definite answer.

David suggested selling your dog and car to pay the debt.

I couldn’t risk missing that train.

常用的能接动名词的动词有：

承认__________，感激__________，避免__________，建议___________，不禁__________，庆祝__________，考虑__________，完成___________，延期__________，忍耐___________，喜欢__________，结束___________，想象__________，保持___________，在意__________，错过___________，允许__________，练习___________，冒险__________，明白___________。

例如：

（三）动名词短语作___________。如：

The children are fond of listening to pop music.

Are you interested in going to the show?

Thomas insisted on doing it in his own way.

Excuse me for interrupting you.

Before finishing your homework, you’d better not go out. 做

_____________________。

I insisted on his (him) going to the cinema with me.

I can hardly imagine Peter’s sailing across the Atlantic Ocean in five days.

Linda’s coming will do you good.

What made him angry was their (them) laughing.

（五）动名词的完成式和被动语态：

（1）完成式表示__________________________________。例如：

I apologize for having broken my promise.

I don’t remember having talked with him before.

I regret not having met you before my marriage/before I got married.

（2）当___________________________________，动名词要用被动语态。例如：

I could no longer stand being treated like that.

She was proud of having been trained in the U.K.

He doesn’t like being laughed at.

（六）某些动词可接不定式也可接动名词做宾语，但意义有差别。

（1）like, love, hate, prefer等表示喜爱，厌恶的动词后面，

She likes dancing. But she wouldn’t like to dance with you.

He looked tired and I didn’t like to disturb him.

I don’t like reading, but I’d like to read a magazine in bed tonight.

Little Jim should love to be taken to the theatre this evening.

The reporter would /should like to see you again.

We don’t like talking about people behind their backs.

（2） forget to do sth. ___________________

forget doing sth.___________________

The light in the office is still on. She forgot to turn it off.

The light in the office is off. She turned it off, but she forgot turning it off.

（3）remember to do sth. _________________

remember doing sth. _________________

Do you remember meeting me at a party last year?

You must remember to leave tomorrow。

（4）stop to do sth. __________________

stop doing sth. __________________

She stopped to have a rest on a big rock by the side of the path.

As long as you live, your heart never stops beating,

（5） regret to do sth. _____________________

regret doing sth. ____________________

I regret saying that.

I regret to tell you the following truth.

（6）try to do sth. __________________

try doing sth. _________________

You must try to do it again.

Let’s try doing the work in some other way.

（7） mean to do sth. __________________

mean doing sth. __________________

If it means delaying more than a week, I’ll not wait.

I mean to help you, and nothing else. 。

I didn’t mean to hurt you. I’m sorry.

Declaring Taiwan independent means declaring war on China.

（8） go on to do sth. _____________________

go on doing sth. _____________________

After he finished his maths, he went on to do his physics.

I hope it won’t go on raining all day long.

现在做一些练习：

1．根据括号里的汉语意思用动名词填空：

1) ____________（游泳）is a very enjoyable exercise.

2) His work is ________________(修自行车).

3) Europeans uses an knife and a fork ______________(吃肉).

4) We will only succeed by ____________________(努力工作）.

5) Tom hates __________________(早晨9点以后起床).

6) I could' t help ________________(迟到).

7) _____________________(等着没用) there won' t be another bus.

2. 用动词不定式或动名词填空：

1) He wanted ____ (see) the book I had bought.

2) Please stop ___ (walk) about the room and sit down.

3) I called ____ (see) her yesterday but she was out.

4) In 1969, the United States succeeded in ____ (send) a rocket to the moon and ___ (land) two astronauts on its surface.

5) We decided ___ (put) off the meeting until Saturday.

6) Let me ___ (see) what you are doing.

7) When the professor finishes ____ (speak), we will ask him a question.

8) He made her ___ (go) although she wanted ___ (stay).

9) Please remember ____ (give) her this letter.

10) We heard him ___ (say) that he disliked ____ (go) abroad any more.

11) The child enjoyed ___ (play) at the seaside.

12) The little boy was made ___ (take) the medicine.

13) I watched the shop assistant ___ (take) the goods down for the shelf and put them on the counter.

14) He remembers ___ (go) to Shanghai with his parents when he was five.

15) She had her husband ___ (wash) her dirty linen.

16) The thief kept ____ (say) he hadn’t taken the purse.

17) The policeman saw him ___ (steal) the bicycle and ride away on it.

18) I’ve persuaded him ___ (help) us do the job.

19) You had better ____ (go) home now. It looks like rain.

20) Let me___ (know) if you had decided ____ (go).

21) He promised ___ (come) to our party.

22) I forget ____ (see) you there.

23) Don’t forget ___ (see) your grandma this Sunday.

24) I must apologize for not ___ (let) you know earlier.

分词有现在分词和过去分词两种。

作为非谓语形式，分词可用作形容词和副词，在句子中充当定语、表语、补语和状语。但它仍保持动词的一般特征，可以有自己的宾语和状语。分词和自己的宾语、状语构成分词短语。

现在分词有一般式和完成式。它的一般式表示和谓语动词所表示的动作同时发生的行为或存在的状态；它的完成式（having + 过去分词）表示在谓语动词所表示的动作之前发生的动作或存在的状态。

现在分词有主动语态和被动语态(being + 过去分词)。

过去分词只有一般式，表示在谓语动词所表示的动作之前发生的动作。过去分词（及物动词）本身可以表示被动的含义，因而没有别的被动形式。

1．作定语。

作定语的分词通常放在被修饰的名词________________。

如果被修饰的词是something，anything，everything，nothing等，则分词放在这些词________________。

分词短语通常放在被修饰的名词_________________。

This is an interesting book。

China is a developing country.

There is something interesting in the news。

The man sitting by the window is our math teacher。

The machine run by the old worker is made in Shanghai。

1. We lived in the house __________________(我舅舅们修建的).

2. Any medicine ________(服用) without the advice of a doctor can cause trouble.

3. We spent two hours discussing the plan ________________ (她制定的).

4. Lessons _____________ (易学的)are soon forgotten.

** ______________ (易学的) lessons are soon forgotten.

2、作状语。分词和分词短语作状语时，可以表示时间、原因、行为方式等意义。表示时间和原因的分词短语相当于对应的状语从句。

When the students saw the teacher entering the room，They stood up。

= seeing the teacher entering the room, they stood up.

When I was walking in the street, I came across an old friend of mine.

__________________________, I came across an old friend of mine.

After he had heard the news, he jumped with joy.

_________________________, he jumped with joy.

The metal expands when it is heated.

___________，the Metal expands.

When he was asked why he did not do it, he began to cry.

________________________________, he began to cry.

As I was excited，I couldn’t go to sleep

_____________，I couldn’t go to sleep。

Because he was a student，he was interested in sports.

______________________，he was interested in sports.

Because they were inspired (激励) by Dr.Yang’s speech，Li Hua and his classmates decided to study physics harder

_______________，Li Hua and his classmates decided to study physics harder.

The children went away。They laughed as they went.

The children went away laughing.

The professor stood there and he was surrounded by many students

The professor stood there，_______________________________

He sat on the sofa, and watched TV.

He sat on the sofa, _____________________

If you work hard, you will succeed.

________________, you will succeed.

If you use your head, you will find a way.

________________, you will find a way.

If water is heated to a certain temperature, it turns into steam.

_________________________________, water turns into steam.

1. I saw him running along the street.

2. I felt an ant climbing over my leg.

3. Suddenly I noticed her standing outside.

4. I smell something burning.

5. I hear a girl singing in the hall.

1. I would have him waiting for me at the gate of the park.

2. Sorry, I kept you waiting a long time.

3. They shut the door and left, leaving the fire burning.

(I) 用在_______________ 之后作宾补。

1. The speaker raised his voice, but he still could not make himself heard.

2. Jane got her bad tooth pulled out at the dentist’s.

3. They are going to have the entrance hall painted white.

(II) 用在 ______________ 之后作宾补。

1. He didn’t notice his wallet stolen.

2. I was washing my clothes when I heard my name called.

(III) 用在 ______________之后作宾补。

1. He did not want such question discussed.

2. I would like my living room painted light blue.

4、作表语。

The result of the test is disappointing.

I feel disappointed in the result of the test.

He is interested in the book.

The result is surprising.

I am surprised at what he said.

现在分词作表语，说明主语的性质或特征，意为______________，

exciting, moving, amusing, astonishing, frightening, interesting, relaxing, shocking, surprising, terrifying, tiring etc.

过去分词作表语多表示主语所处的状态，意为_________________，

excited, moved, amused, astonished, frightened, interested, relaxed, satisfied, surprised, terrified, tired etc.

（1）被动结构强调___________，而系表结构强调________________

（2）_________________可以接by + 动作的执行者，___________则不行。

The glass is broken.

The glass is broken by Tom.

The bookstore is closed at six.

The bookstore is closed now.

注意：

（1）分词作状语时，_____________ 和 ______________ 一致：

__________at the top of the mountain，I saw lots of people there.

__________from the top of the mountain, the city is beautiful.

__________again, I found the book interesting.

__________again, the book was found interesting.

（2）在see，hear，watch，notice等动词后，

用动词不定式作宾语补语，通常表示_______________________。

如果用现在分词作宾语补语，则通常表示____________________。

We sat two hours and watched the teacher __________ the experiment.

We passed by the classroom and saw the teacher________ the experiment.

（3）在“have+宾语+分词”的结构中，

He had the fire ___________ (burn) day and night。

Father had me ___________(swim) the whole summer vacation。

Mary had her dress __________(wash).

Tom had his legs ____________ (break)

I had my watch __________(steal) yesterday。

My mother had me ___________ (wash) my dress.

The teacher had me ______________ (clean) the classroom.

上面已经谈到，过去分词可以表示“被动”和“完成”等意义，因此没有时态和

语态方面的形式变化。下面谈一下现在分词的时态和语态。

1.现在分词的完成式(having+过去分词)表示____________________________。

Having written the letter，John went to the post office.

(=After he had written the letter，John went to the post office.

Having lived in Beijing for years，Lao Wang knows the city quite well.

(=As he has lived in Beijing for years，Lao Wang knows the city quite well.)

Having drunk two glasses of water, Xiao Ma felt a little better.

(=After he had drunk two glasses of water Xiao Ma felt a little better.)

2.现在分词的被动语态(being +过去分词)通常表示“正在被…”的意思。如强调现在分词表示的动作发生在谓语动词所表示的动作之前时，可用现在分词被动语态的完成式(having + been +过去分词)。

The bridge being built will be completed next month.

Having been kept out of the room about half an hour for his returning late，Tom was let in.

exercises:

1、用现在分词或过去分词结构改写下列句子:

1）The teacher is taking a walk on the playground. He is our teacher of English.

2）The birds filled the air with music. They were singing in the trees.

3) Here is a novel. It was written b Lu Xun.

4) The language is English. It is spoken in Australia.

5) Do you know the number of students? They are coming to the English Evening.

6) I could hear the boys. They were playing in the field.

7) He was glad to find the fire. It was burning brightly.

8) I watched them. They were dancing.

9) I saw a man. He was banging at your door

10）Tom rushed into the room. He was covered with snow.

11）Mary sat on the ground. She talked with Jane.

12）I stood at the gate. I was waiting for his arrival.

13) John put on his raincoat because he saw that it was raining.

14) As he was stepping carelessly off the pavement, he was knocked down by the bus.

15) He used chopsticks. He ate his dinner.

16) As he was going downstairs he tripped on the carpet.

17) When I was learning English, I had much trouble in pronunciation.

18) As he himself was one of the exploited Pottier shared their bitterness and sufferings.

19) The bridge had been weakened by successive storms and was no longer safe.

20) What is the book? It is being translated.

21) As we did not know his address we could not get in touch with him.

22) As she had been there many times, she knew the place quit well.

23) As we had not got a reply from them, we became quite worried.

24) Because they had been brought up in the city, they knew little about farmwork.

25) He was a League member. He ought to take the lead in such activities.

2、改正下列句子中的错误(注意分词短语的逻辑主语和句子的主语是否一致)。

Example:

Climbing to the top of the hill, there is a magnificent view to be seen.

-----Climbing to the top of the hill, one can see a magnificent view.

-----If one climbs to the top of the hill, there is a magnificent view to be seen.

1）Being Sunday I shall have a quiet day at home.

______________ I shall have quiet day at home.

2）Entering the house, the door closed with a bang.

3）Walking through the park, the flowers made a lovely sight.

4）Waiting for a bus, a brick fell on my head.

5）Having been away from his hometown for more than thirty years, no one recognize him.

高三英语复习课件【篇3】

总述: 谓语动词的变化形式取决于时态和语态: 英语的时态有十六种, 中学英语中有十二种常见的时态; 语态有两种, 即主动语态和被动语态

1.在主动语态中, 各种时态的谓语动词的一般形式如下:

现在 do / does am / is / are doing have / has done have / has been doing

过去 did was / were doing had done had been doing

将来 shall / will do shall / will be doing shall / will have done X

如果谓语是be动词, 则可用be动词的适当形式( be / am / is / are / was / were / been)代替以上表格中的黑体字部分. 此外, 过去将来时的形式是: should / would do或should / would be

2.在被动语态中, 各种时态的谓语动词的一般形式如下:

现在 am / is / are done am / is / are being done have / has been done X

过去 was / were done was / were being done had been done X

将来 shall / will be done X shall / will have been done X

另外, 过去将来时的被动语态形式是should / would be done

一.一般现在时:

1.构成: 通常以动词原形表示. 主语为第三人称单数时, 则用动词的第三人称单数形式来表示

2.用法:

a. It is fine today.

b. I am a student.

c. I get up at six every day.

d. My father never takes a bus; he walks to his office.

a. Japan is to the east of China.

b. The sun rises in the east.

c. A horse is a useful animal.

③.表示将来确定会发生的动作(如己安排好或计划好的动作或按时刻表将来一定会发生的动作), 可以这样使用的动词有: go, come, leave, start, arrive等

a. My train leaves at 6:30.

b. The football match is played the day after tomorrow.

a. I will let you know as soon as I hear from him.

b. We will go if it is fine tomorrow.

c. I will be away when he arrives.

d. We shall not begin the discussion until he arrives.

e. Mother, I won’t go out unless you agree.

f. Don’t try to run before you begin to walk.

⑤.在某些以here / there开头的句子中用一般现在时动词表示现在正在发生的动作

a. Here comes the bus.=The bus is coming.

b. There goes the bell.

⑥.在体育比赛过程中, 解说员叙述迅速, 短暂动作时, 可用一般现在时, 表示正在进行的或刚刚发生的动作

a. Ma Lianbao passes the ball to Mu Tiezhu, Mu shoots – a fine shot !

a. When the curtain rises, Juliet is sitting at her desk. The phone rings. She picks it up and listens quietly.

①.表示说话时正在进行着的动作, 或现阶段正在进行而说话时不一定正在进行的动作

a. I am writing a letter.

b. My mother is making a dress these few days.

②.表示即将发生的动作(如在最近按计划或安排好要进行的动作), 常见的有这种用法的动词有: come /go / leave / start / arrive等, 常与表示将来时间的状语连用

a. They are going to Shanghai on Friday.

b. John is coming here next week.

③.现在进行时动词与always, continually, constantly等连用, 表示反复出现的或习惯性的动作

a. The little boy is always asking questions.

b. You are always saying that sort of thing.

④.在一定的上下文中, 前一句用一般现在时动词表述现在发生的事实, 后一句用现在进行时动词来阐述这一事实的原因, 结果, 目的等

a. He frowns. He is worrying about his boy.他皱着眉头, 因为他在为他的孩子担心. (is worrying表示原因)

b. She criticizes him. She is trying to correct his wrong habits. 她批评他, 想纠正他的坏习惯. (is trying表示目的)

c. She lets her child have his own way. She is spoiling him. 她不管她的孩子, 把他惯坏了. ( is spoiling表示结果)

⑤.不表示持续的行为, 而表示知觉, 感觉, 看法, 认识, 感情, 愿望或某种状态的动词通常不用现在进行时, 如: see, hear, smell, taste, recognize, notice, forget, remember, understand, know, believe, suppose, mean, think, love, hate, care, like, dislike, worry, forgive, want, wish, hope, refuse, feel like, belong to , possess, own, have, be, seem等

a. He has gone to Shanghai. ( =He went to Shanghai and he is not here now. )

b. I have opened the window. ( =I opened the window and the window is now open.)

c. The concert has started. ( =The concert started and is now going on. )

d. I have had breakfast. (=I had breakfast and I am not hungry now. )

②.表示开始于过去, 持续到现在(也许还会继续进行下去)的动作或状态, 用于延续性动词, 且句中常带有表示段时间的时间状语

a. I have studied English since 1987.

b. He has lived here for two years.

c. He has been ill for ten days.

3.现在完成时与一般过去时的区别:

①.现在完成时和一般过去时所表示的动作都发生在过去, 但前者将过去的动作与现在的结果或对现在的影响联系起来, 而后者只限于表示过去的动作本身, 与现在无关

②.现在完成时不能与表明确时间的状语如: yesterday, last year, two days ago, when I came in等连用, 但可与表示不明确时间的状语如: already, yet, sometimes, often, before, lately, recently, once, twice, ever等连用, 也可以和包括现在在内的时间状语如: this morning, today, this week, this year等连用

a. She has already come.

b. I have met him before.

c. Ma Hong has always been a good student.

d. Have you ever been to the Great Wall ?

e. I have seen him this morning.

四.现在完成进行时:

①.它具有现在完成时的特点, 即表示动作发生在过去, 延续到现在或对现在产生影响

②.它具有现在进行时的特点, 即可以表示此动作仍在进行或还会继续

a. Mr. Smith has taught English for twenty years. ( 至今为止教过二十年英语, 至于teach是否结束或是否延续, 不得而知)

b. Mr. Smith has been teaching English for twenty years.( 现在仍在教英语,而且将持续下去)

3.用法:

①.表示现在之前的一段时间里一直进行的动作, 此动可能仍在进行, 也可能刚刚停止

a. I have been reading the book all the morning.

b. He has been staying here for two hours.

c. I have been living in Beijing since 1972.

a. I have been calling you several times in the past two days.

4.现在完成时与现在完成进行时的区别: 前者着重表示过去动作对现在的影响或结果; 后者着重表示过去动作的持续进行

a. I have written six letters since I got back.我己经写了六封信 (强调结果)

b. I have been writing letter since I got back. 我回家后一直在写信 (强调“一直在写”)

c. I have read this book.我读过这本书了(强调“读过”这一结果)

d. I have been reading this book.我一直在读这本书 (强调“一直在读”)

2.用法:

①.表示过去某一时刻或某一段时间内发生的动作或情况, 其中包括习惯性动作

a. I met him yesterday.

b. I used to go to school early every morning.

c. He entered the classroom, sat down at his desk and began to work.

d. Last night, I listened to the radio for two hours and went to bed at midnight.

a. Helen had left her keys in the office so she had to wait until her husband came home.

③.用一般过去时的句子一般有过去的时间状语, 有时也用地点状语暗示动作的发生是在过去

a. Have you seen a pen ? I left it here this morning.

a. This time yesterday we were having an important meeting.

b. A year ago we were living in Shanghai.

②.过去进行时常与always, continually, frequently等词连用, 表示过去经常发生或反复发生的情况

a. The old man was always losing his way.

b. The two brothers were frequently quarrelling.

③.表示过去将要发生的动作, 这一用法仅限于一些表示位置转移的动词, 如: go, come, start, stay, leave等

④.过去进行时经常与一般过去时配合使用, 过去进行时表示过去的时间背景

a. The teacher was giving us a lesson when Tom walked into the room.

2.用法:

①.表示过去某时间或动作以前己经完成的动作或己存在的状态, 即“过去的过去”

a. When all his money had gone, Marx had to leave his house in London.

b. Marx had learned some English before he got to England.

c. He said he had never been to Shanghai.

d. By the middle of last month I had lived in Beijing for five years.

②.在带有after / before引导的时间状语的句子中, 由于after / before本身的词义己经表明了时间的先后, 所以这类句子中常用一般过去时代替过去完成时

a. We left the house before it began to rain.

b. I didn’t wait long before he came.

c. After we finished the tea, we all sat on the grass.

d. After he arrived in England, Marx worked hard to improve his English.

八.过去完成进行时:

2.用法: 表示一直持续进行到过去某一时刻的动作, 该动作可能刚刚结束, 也可能还在进行

a. I had been waiting for two hours before the manager came down to see me.

b. By the end of he had been learning English for five years.

1.shall / will do (shall用于第一人称), 此结构表示单纯的将来, 不涉及主语的主观意愿

a. I shall be twenty years old next year.

b. You will meet him at the station this afternoon.

c. The train will arrive soon.

2.be going to do sth, 此结构表示打算最近或将来要做某事, 或说话人根据己有迹象认为非常可能即将发生的事

a. I am going to meet Tom at the station at six.

b. He is going to stay here for a week.

c. Look at these black clouds --- it is going to rain.

d. I am afraid I am going to have a bad cold.

3.be +动词不定式, 此结构表示职责, 义务, 意图, 约定, 可能性等

a. You are to be back by 10 o’clock.

b. There is to be a sports meet next week.

c. We are to meet at the school gate.

4.be about to do sth, 此结构表示“立刻, 马上”要做某事或发生某情况

a. We are about to leave.

b. Autumn harvest is about to start.

a. This time tomorrow we will be talking with the boss about this matter.

b. I will be studying in this university for the next four years.

a. I will be seeing him next month.

b. We will be taking our holiday at the seaside in July.

c. He will be arriving at six tomorrow morning.

十一.将来完成时:

2.用法: 表示在将来的某一时刻之前将要完成的动作, 这一动作也可能继续进行

a. By seven o’clock this afternoon we shall have arrived in Shanghai if the train keeps good line.

b. Before noon we will have completed this work.

十二.过去将来时:

a. He said he would go to Shanghai for the holiday.

b. He told me that I should succeed.

a. They were going to have a meeting.

b. The students were going to plant some trees around the playground.

a. We were to finish the work in three days.

b. I was about to go out when a friend dropped in.

2.用法: 过去将来时表示相对过去某一时刻来说将要发生的动作或呈现的状态, 以上各形式的具体用法与一般将来时各形式的用法相似

a. The work must be done right now.

b. That prisoner may be sentenced to death.

a. His bike has been stolen.

b. This window was broken last night.

a. China was liberated in 1949.

b. I was told you were late this morning.

a. The plan has already been made.

b. Yao Ming was elected MVP of the last week.

三.主动句变被动句:

a. The manager gave me ten minutes to decide whether I should accept the offer.

→I was given ten minutes to decide whether I should accept the offer.

2.带有宾语从句的主动句变被动句时, 宾语从句变成主语从句, 通常不位于句首, 句首用形式主语it

a. We can learn from the text that delicious apples are big.

→It can be learned from the text that delicious apples are big.

3.带有双宾语的主动句变被动句时, 将直接宾语或间接宾语变成被动句的主语都可

a. My brother gave me a birthday present.

→I was given a birthday present. / A birthday present was given to me.

4.带有复合宾语 (即宾语+宾补) 的主动句变被动句时, 宾补的形式一般不变, 只是名称变成了主补, 但当宾补是不带to的不定式时, 要变成带to的不定式

a. I saw him play near the river. He was seen to play near the river.

5.含有短语动词的主动句变成被动句时, 不要遗漏短语动词中的介词或副词

a. The children must be taken good care of. / Good care must be taken of the children.

四.应注意的问题:

a. The children were excited at the news.

b. We are interested in the English novel.

c. The mother was worried about her son’s absence.

b. This kind of cloth washed very well.这种布很耐洗

c. This pen writes quite smoothly.这支笔很好使

d. This dish tastes good.这道菜味道不错

e. This kind of cloth feels smooth and soft.这料子摸起光滑柔软

3.不是所有的及物动词都有被动语态, 某些表示状态或关系的动词或短语动词只有主动语态, 而无相对应的被动语态. 常见的这类动词有: cost花费, fit适合, have有, hold容纳, lack缺乏, own拥有, suit适合, fail失败, belong to属于, agree with同意

高三英语复习课件【篇4】

考研是一个极具选拔性和自学性的考试，复习考研也是个长期漫长的过程，鉴于此，在总结不同梯度考生基础阶段学习情况的基础上，为广大考生具体规划考研英语基础阶段的复习，以便为以后考研的成功打下良好的基础。

现在正值春季，正是考研英语基础复习阶段，具体每日的复习时间，需要根据自身情况而定。不管同学们基础好还是差，都必须保证每天花在英语复习上的时间为两小时以上。由于英语复习具备连贯性，所以定下计划持之以恒很重要。

具体到每一天来讲，早上晨读时间的40分钟当然属于英语，而另外，上午从10点30左右可以开始正式的英语复习，坚持一个半小时。在春季基础阶段，只要的复习内容应安排为词汇和语法，坚持每天两篇阅读，每日如此推进，日日不断。在每天进行新内容的同时，在第二天可以用一点时间(半小时内)翻阅一下昨天复习任务，然后再进行当天的复习计划。

很多学生将考研失利的原因归结为词汇量不够，因此耗费了大量时间和精力机械地背诵英文词汇。其实，考研和国外的IELTS、TOEFL考试相比，最大的区别就在于，考研有明确的考纲，有规定的词汇考查范围。考研英语复习过程中，考生完全不需要毫无目的地记忆大量词汇，只需要将大纲规定的考研词汇研究透彻即可。

英语基础阶段以记忆词汇为主。在记单词的过程中可以采用以下五种记忆方法：形象记忆法、联想记忆法、例句记忆法、循环记忆法和同素记忆法。这五种方法中，联想记忆法和循环记忆法这两种方法比较好，具体的方法运用在我们的课程上有详细讲解。

语法是很多同学的弱项环节。语法弱意味着不能根据有序单词表达出的意思做出正确的反映，会造成信息链的断裂，而只有当你分清了句子的结构之后，才能将阅读、作文等内容和题意理解得更加明白。在考卷的阅读部分有四大难点：单词、长句子、非谓语、介词。这四点，其实有三点都涉及到了语法。因此加强语法的掌握力度可以有效拉高英语得分。

现在考研英语对阅读的考查越来越多，这也要求我们进一步的提高阅读能力。虽然考研的阅读理解有一定的规律可循，但是这些规律也在逐年的淡化。这几年反技巧的出题趋势越来越明显，考试越来越重视考生的真正阅读分析能力。所以，的考研考生们一定要提前打好基础，每天除了背单词、巩固语法知识外，还要阅读一定量的英语报刊。据了解，考研的阅读理解很多都是摘自国外的一些著名的报纸，如比如《发现》、《商业周刊》、《探索》、《经济学家》、《新闻周刊》等专业型极高的刊评等等。如果能找来的话，这些都是很好的阅读材料。而且还要刻意训练自己快速阅读的能力。考研英语的阅读量越来越大，里面不但有很多考查全文的主旨题，还有很多的细节题和作者态度题，这些内容的提炼都要我们在平时的阅读中渐渐地培养。

英语并不可怕，可怕的是同学们没有持之以恒的毅力，希望大家从现在开始认真备考，预祝大家在明年春天有一份喜悦的收获!

高三英语复习课件【篇5】

单项选择题是考查学生对句子的层次，对语法规则、词汇等掌握的情况，通过设定语境，词语或某些成分的位置变化等将考查知识与能力结合起来，突出语言的交际性、灵活性，实现知识与能力相结合的目标。有些题看起来似乎很难，很复杂，但只要学会掌握正确的分析问题的方法，那么，一切难题都是可以解答的。下面就一些题型的解题思路与技巧作一些归纳。

例.1. There are two small rooms in the house, ______is served as a kitchen .

A. the smaller of them B. the smaller of which

C. the smaller one D. the small one

2. ______ is well known, _____ Taiwan is part of China .

A. It; that B. It; which C. As; / D. As; that

例. --- Is Mrs White in the office ?

--- Yes, _____ she is on duty, she must be there today .

A. since B. until C. if D. while

例. I went to Beijing last week; ______ I met an old friend of mine .

A. there B. which C. where D. that

例. _____ some of this juice--- perhaps you’ll like it .

A. Trying B. Try C. To try D. Having tried

例. ______ several times, but he still does not know how to do it properly .

C. Having been shown D. I have shown him

例. 1. _____, we all went out for a picnic .

A. Being a fine day B. As being a fine day

C. It was a fine day D. It being a fine day

例. ____ can anyone be sure ______ look like in a million years ?

A. What; man will B. What; will man

C. That; man will D. That; will man

例. 1. Yu Gong talked of the difficulty he _____ the mountains in front of his house .

2. In my opinion, it is the best use _____ could be ______ this money .

C. which; made from D. that; made of

例. It was in the lab ____ was taken charge of by Drof. Havries ____ they did the experiment .

例. She looks forward every night to _____ American to study .

例. ____ we had been looking forward to .

A. After Kate stands the new teacher

B. Before Rose the new teacher stood

例. It was said ____ was ____ the Chinese raised silkworms .

A. that that; what B. what that; how

C. that that; how D. that what; that

1．判断动作的执行者：

例.1. --- Do you have any letters _____ , sir ?

--- Thank you . I have had them _____ .

A. typed; typed B. typing; typing

C. to type; type D. to be typed; typed

2.--- Do you have many exercises ______ tonight, Tom ?

--- Yes . Our teachers give us lots of exercises every day .

2．从问答中找信息：

例. 1.--- Didn’t you pass the exam ?

--- _____, or I couldn’t _____ by my parents .

A. No, I did; be scolded B. No, I didn’t; have been scolded

C. Yes, I do; have scolded D. Yes, I did; have been scolded

2.--- Can I have _____ orange, Mum ?

--- Oh. Your sister has had it .

A. another B. an C. one more D. the other

3．从谓语动词的时态来判断：

例. 1. The students feel happy that the building _____ is for the teachers, though there is much noise .

2. He must ____ a shower, for I can hear the water ______ .

C. have; running D. be having; running

3. The price _____, but I doubt whether it will remain so .

C. has gone down D. was going down

4．从句中的时间状语来判断：

例. 1. The house _____ are for the teachers and construction work will begin soon .

A. built B. to be built C. to build D. being built

2. The teachers have moved into the new houses ______ last term .

A. built B. to be built C. being built D. having been built

3. The houses ______ now near the school are for our teachers .

A. are being built B. being built

根据某些语法规则及对话体，句中的某些成分是可以省略的。而出题的人往往采用省略。

例. 1. People shake hands and say “ How do you do ?” when ______ to each other .

A. being introduced B. introducing

2. When _____ some questions about the accident, the manager of the coal mine kept silent .

A. ask B. being asked C. asked D. asking

例. If _____, the material will give ______ an unpleasant smell .

例. 1. An apple is _____, if not better than , an orange .

2. Of course they were later than ______; but _____ they were in time to start the game .

A. expected; at all B. expecting; in all

C. we expected; after all D. expected; after all

例. This is the first film ______ I have seen in my life .

A. which B. where C. what D. /

例--Mum, why do you always ask me to drink a glass of milk every day?

-----------______enough protein and nutrition as you______

A . Get, grow up B. Getting, grow up

C. To get, are growing up D. To be getting, are growing up

例1.-----What do you think makes Jane so sad?

--------______ the news that her father died yesterday.

A. Because she heard B. She heard C. Hearing D . Heard

2.We should do all ____ we can ______ the poor children in the western area

A. what .help B. that , to help C. what, to help D. that, help

例.With lots of trees and flowers _____ here and there, our school looks very beautiful.

A. having planted B. planted C. having been planted D. to be planted

例.______ the yard ,I found it_____ with lots of ______ leaves.

A. Entering, covering, falling B. Entering, covered, fallen

C. Entering , covering ,fallen D. Having entered, covered, falling

例.___________,it wasn’t a dad holiday.

A. Considering everything B. Considered everything

C . Considering anything D. Considered anything

弄清楚句中的动词是及物还是不及物动词是决定主动语态还是被动语态的关键，是选非谓语动词形式的关键。

例.Without the teacher_______ us, none of us tried our best in the running

A. times B. timing C. timed D. time

例.1. The old scientist often has his light ______ all night long

A. burn B. burned C. burning D. to be burned__

2.The boy lay on the ground, with his eyes_______ straight upward, and his teeth_________

A. looking, setting B. looked ,set C. looking, set D. looked, setting

例.1.Never_______ faith in himself, the scientist went on with his research

A. losing B. to lose C. lost D. to be lost

2. _______ in thought , Einstein knocked into the tree

A. Lost B. To lose C. Losing D. To be lost

例. _______ great help, I could get rid of all the difficulty and succeeded

A. Offered B. Having offered C. Being supplied D. Having supplied

例.The Yellow river, ______ “the mother river”, runs across like a huge dragon

A. calling B. called C. being called D. to be called

与省略相反，编者按语法规则增加一些成分或变换句子的语序等使原来的句子的结构发生变化，使之复杂化

例.Is this hotel_____ you said we could stay in your letter?

A. the one B. which C. where D. that

2. Who has the manager_______ the machine?

A. repaired B. have repaired C. had repaired d. to repair

例.It was with great courage________ the boy told the truth_______

A. which, that B. when, that C. as, that D. that, that

例.The scientist has developed a new kind of plant, _____ of great value to farming.

A. which he thinks is B. which he thinks it is

C. which he thinks it D. he thinks which is

例.The young man, who was caught______ the lady’s purse in the shop, was taken to the police station.

A. steal B. to steal C. stealing D. stole

例.1. They are talking about the difficulty the kind old man_______ a hope school for the children.

A. has set up B. has to set up C. setting up D. has setting up

2. Hearing the news, he rushed out, ____ the book____ on the table and disappeared.

A. left, lain upon B. leaving, lying upon C. leaving, lie upon D. left, lay opened

例.Salesmen are so smart that customers can’t help_____ to buy something they don’t really need.

A. to be persuaded B. persuading C. being persuade D. be persuaded

例.The old scientist is considered______ the mobile phone.

A. inventing B. to invent C. to have invented D. having invented

例.1. She left a child,______ home as an old woman.

A. and returned B. returning C. to return D. returned

2. It was a matter of _____ would take the position

A. who B. whoever C. whom D. whomever

高三英语复习课件【篇6】

英语中动词有谓语和非谓语之分。谓语动词在人称和数上要与主语保持一致，而非谓语动词没有人称和数的变化。非谓语动词主要包括：动词不定式，动词的-ing形式和过去分词三种。

学非谓语动词必须要了解它们的形式和在句子中的功能，请看下面两个表格：

1.非谓语动词的时态和语态形式（以动词do为例）：

一般式主动 to do doing 动词的过去分词只有一种形式即done。及物动词的过去分词常表示被动和完成，而个别动词(多数是不及物动词)只表示完成

被动 to have been done having been done

进行式 to be doing ×

完成进行式 to have been doing ×

2. 非谓语动词在句子中的功能：

不定式 √ √ √ √ √ √ ×

_ing形式 √ √ √ √ √ √ √

过去分词 × × √ √ √ √ ×

一．动词不定式的时态：

不定式的一般式通常表示不定式动作发生在谓语动词之后或与谓语动词同时发生；不定式的进行式（通常用于动态延续性动词）表示不定式动作与谓语动作同步发生；不定式的完成式通常表示不定式动作先于谓语动词而发生或表示一个实际未发生的动作；不定式的完成进行式往往强调不定式动作在谓语动词之前一直在进行。例如：

1. When I spoke to him, he pretended ___________(look) for something here and there.

2. He looked tired. He seemed ______________(work) all night.

3. Charles Babbage is generally considered ___________(invent) the first computer.

4. I would love _________ (go) to the party last night but I had to work extra hours to finish a report.

5. He ordered the man __________ (go) there at once.

二．动词不定式的语态：

一般情况下，在一个含有不定式的句子中，如果有不定式的逻辑主语（即不定式动作的执行者）该不定式常用主动形式；如果出现的是不定式的逻辑宾语（即不定式动作的承受者），该不定式常用被动形式。但是，下面几种结构却常用主动表示被动：

(1).在easy, difficult, hard, heavy, light, fit, nice, comfortable等表示性质特征的形容词之后的不定式或用这些词修饰一个名词后跟的不定式常用主动表示被动；

(2).少数动词如blame(责备), let(出租)等的不定式作表语时常用主动表示被动。

6. This sentence is easy ___________ (understand).

7. I can’t go out with you today, as I have a lot of clothes_________ (wash).

8. “Have you any clothes __________ (wash) today?” asked the maid (女佣).

9.Our school is a nice place _________ (visit).

10. I found the chair comfortable _________ (sit) in.

11. I think the question difficult ________ (answer).

12. It’s I who am ________ (blame).

13. The officer ordered the soldiers ________ (fire) the guns.

14. The officer ordered the guns _________ (fire).

三._ing形式的时态:

_ing形式的一般式通常表示该动作与谓语动词同时发生或发生在谓语之后；完成式则表示

动作先于谓语动词而发生。如：

15. ________ (Walk) through the park, I saw some lovely flowers.

16. He was praised for __________ (teach) for 60 years.

17. I heard him __________ (sing) when I passed his room.

18. _________ (Finish) the work, he went home.

19. He insisted on _________ (join) the army.

四._ing形式的语态：

一般情况下，需要找准-ing动词的逻辑主语，若它们之间是主谓关系，-ing动词常用

主动；若它们之间是动宾关系，-ing动词就要用被动。但在动词need, want, require,及形容

词worth之后的-ing必须用主动表示被动。如：

20. He won’t come without __________ (invite).

21. The flowers in the garden need _______ (water).

22. Thank you for _________ (give) us so much help.

23. The building ________ (build) now will be a hospital.

24. ________ (give) such a good chance, how could she let it slip?

25. The book is well worth ________ (read).

动词不定式和动词的_ing形式都可以在句子中作主语。

（1）、一般来说，不定式作主语时，通常表示一次性的、特指的、具体的或将来的动作；而_ing形式作主语时，通常表示一个经常性的、泛指的、或不具体的动作。如：

26. ________ (refuse) him is not easy this time.

27. _________ (walk) is a good form of exercise for both the young and old.

28. ________ (teach) English is my job.

29. ________ (be) a teacher is her greatest wish in the future.

（2）、当句子的主语和表语都是非谓语动词时，两者在形式上一般保持一致；比较状语从句中的主语形式通常也取决于主句里的主语形式。如：

30. ______ (see) is to believe.==________ (see) is believing.

31. ________ (say) is easier than to do.

32. ________ (speak) a foreign language is more difficult than reading it.

（3）、在日常英语中，为了句子结构的平衡，常用it作形式主语而将不定式或-ing放在句末

这时候要注意下面的习惯句型：

It + be + 形容词或名词+ (for / of sb.) + to do sth.

It + take + sb. +some time / sth. + to do sth.

It + be + no use / no good / useless / a waste of sth. / worth + doing sth.

There + be + no + doing sth. (做某事是不行或不可能的)

33. It was foolish of you _________ (give) up what you rightly owned.

34. There is no ________ (hold) back the wheel of history.

35. I think it’s no good _______ (argue) with your parents.

动词不定式和动词的_ing形式都可以在句子中作宾语。

（1）、有些及物动词后只能接动词不定式作宾语，不能接-ing形式，常见的有：hope, wish, expect, decide, promise, offer, agree, manage, pretend, plan, refuse, fail 等等。

（2）、有些及物动词后只能接动词的_ing形式作宾语，不能接不定式，常见的有：enjoy, imagine, risk, appreciate, suggest, advise, admit, miss, practise, forbid, avoid, resist, escape, delay, finish, permit, allow, mind, keep, consider, excuse 等等。

（3）、有些动词后既可以接不定式，也可以接-ing形式作宾语，意义相同，常见的有：begin, start, continue, intend, bear, attempt等等。但要注意，begin, start 如遇下面三种情况时接不定式为最佳：

A. 句子的主语是物而不是人时，如：The ice began to melt.

B. 当begin, start 用了进行时态时, 如：He’s beginning to understand it.

C. 当begin, start 后作宾语的动词属于心理活动、精神状态类动词（如realize, understand, love, like, know 等等）时，如：It began to rain and I began to realize I should go home.

（4）、有些动词后既可以接不定式，也可以接-ing形式作宾语，意义有细微差别，常见的动词有：like / love / prefer / hate to do sth.(表示一个特定的、一次性的、将来的动作)

like /love / prefer /hate doing sth. (表示一般的、习惯性的、或正在进行的动作)

36. I like _________ (swim) but I don’t like _______ (swim) today.

37. Would you love ________ (go) to the zoo with us?

38. I felt like _______ (cry) at the news.

（5）、有些动词后既可以接不定式，也可以接-ing形式作宾语，意义完全不同，常见动词有：

39. We must try ________ (finish) the work on time.

Let’s try _______ (work) out the maths problem in another way,

40. I remember ______ (see) her somewhere before.

You must remember _______ (post) the letter for me.

41. He forgot ______ (pay) and asked to be paid again.

Don’t forget _______ (turn) off the light when you leave.

42. I regret _______ (miss) such a good chance.

I regret _______ (say) that I can’t lend you so much money.

43. Doing like that means _________ (cheat).

I didn’t mean ________ (hurt) your feeling that day.

44. I can’t help ________ (do) housework today. I’m busy preparing a report.

I couldn’t help _________ (think) of my childhood while seeing the film.

45. When the teacher came in, the students stopped _______ (talk).

As he was very busy that day, he didn’t stop _______ (talk) with me.

46. Though it was raining, the peasants went on ________ (work) in the fields.

After listening to the text, we went on _______(read).

47. The baby needs ______ (look) after. =The baby needs ________ after.

You don’t need _______ (look) after the baby today.

48. Our school is well worth ________ (visit).

Our school is well worthy ________ (visit).= Our school is well worthy of _________.

（6）、介词后的宾语一般用动词的-ing形式，但要注意：but和except之后通常接不定式；介词之后若有连接词时也要接不定式。如：

49. I have no choice but _______ (wait).

50. He gave me some advice on how _______ (study) it well.

51. He has no idea of what _______ (do) next.

52. I was about ______ (go) out when it began to rain.

注意：A. 下面短语中的to是介词，后面要接动词的-ing形式而不接不定式。

devote---to---, look forward to, pay attention to, prefer---to---, lead to, be close to, refer to, belong to, as to, get down to, owing to, be / get /become used to(习惯于------),等等。

B.有些短语中介词经常省略，这时要注意接动词的-ing形式，如：be busy (in) doing sth., spend money /time (in) doing sth., have difficulty /trouble / problems (in) doing sth., prevent / stop ---(from) doing sth.,等等。

（7）、当不定式和_ing形式作“主语+谓语+宾语+补语”句型中的宾语时，要用it作形式宾语，把真正的宾语置于补语之后，常见句型有：

主语+ make / feel /think /find /consider, etc. + it + adj. / n. + (for / of sb.) + to do sth.

主语+ make /feel /think /find /consider, etc. + it + no good /no use /useless + doing sth.

所有的非谓语动词都可以在句子中作表语，其区别在：

（1）、不定式作表语通常表示一次性、特指的、将来的或具体的动作，有时还可以表示计划安排将要发生的事或一种命令要求。

（2）、-ing形式作表语通常表示习惯性、泛指的、不具体的动作或表示主语的性质特征（主要是一些表示感情情绪的词，译为“令人感到……的”）

（3）、过去分词作表语通常表示主语所处的状态，常具有被动含义（主要是一些表示感情情绪的词，译为“感到……的”），这样的动词常见的有：surprise, move, excite, interest, shock, tire, bore, touch, encourage, disappoint, invite, inspire, amuse等等。如：

53. No one is ______ (leave) this building without the permission of the police.

54. My job is ______ (teach) English and my wish is ______ (be) a lawyer.

55. The president is ______ (visit) our country next month.

56. The speech was very _________ (move) and we were all _______ (move) to tears.

所有的非谓语动词都可以作定语，其区别在：

（1）、不定式作定语常放在被修饰的名词之后，通常可以表示：

A. 一个发生在谓语动词之后的动作。如：

The building to be built next month will be a hospital.

B. 被修饰的名词与用作定语的不定式之间可能是逻辑上的“主+谓”关系，也可能是逻辑上的“动+宾”关系。如：

Do you have anyone to help you? (“主+谓”关系)

I have nothing to write. (“动+宾”关系) 我没有什么东西可写。

C. 如果是“动+宾”关系，动词不定式之后有时需要添上适当的介词，而在名词time, place, moment, way等之后的不定式所带的介词可以省略，如：

I have nothing to write on. 我没有什么东西可以上面写字。

I have nothing to write with. 我没有什么东西可以用来写字。

I have no time to rest.

注意：这种带介词的不定式短语常可以转换为“介词+which / whom+不定式”的结构。例：They had only a cold room to live in.==

They had only a cold room in which to live.

D. 下列情况常用不定式作定语：

当句子中的谓语是一些特定的动词，如：be, find, get, give, have, need, want等，它们后面的名词（宾语或表语）常用不定式修饰。

当名词前有特定的定语，如：first, last, next, only, second以及形容词最高级时，其后常用不定式作定语。

在There be句型中，主语之后常用不定式作定语。

有一些特定的名词之后常用不定式作定语，常见的有：time, chance, right, promise, wish, plan, means, ability等。

例：You have no right to speak here.

He is the only person to know the truth.

There is nothing to worry about.

My parents had no chance to go to college.

（2）、动词的_ing形式作定语时，如果是单个词，常放在被修饰名词之前；如果是-ing短语，要放在名词之后。_ing作定语通常可以表示：

A. 被修饰名词的用途，如：a sleeping car, a waiting room, a walking stick, etc.

B. 被修饰名词的性质特征，如：exciting news, a moving story, etc.

C．被修饰名词正在进行的动作，如：a falling leaf, a burning stick, boiling water, etc.

（3）、过去分词作定语通常表示：

A. 被动，如：He is a man loved by all the people.

B. 完成，如：The building built last year is our classroom building.

a fallen leaf, a developed country, boiled water

C. 被修饰名词所处的状态，如：an excited boy, the disappointed parents, surprised eyes, etc.

所有的非谓语动词都可以在句子中充当状语，其区别在：

（1）、不定式（短语）常在句子中作目的、结果和原因状语，常见句式有：

目的：to do sth.; in order to do sth.; so as to do sth.

结果：so + adj. /adv. + as to do sth.; such + n. + as to do sth.; enough to do sth.; too…to do sth.; only to do sth.

原因：be happy / glad / sorry / sad ,etc. + to do sth.

（2）、_ing形式和过去分词位于句首时常作时间、原因、条件状语，位于句末时主要作方式、伴随或结果状语。究竟该用_ing还是过去分词，主要取决于句子的主语，若它们之间是主动关系就用_ing形式，若是被动关系，就用过去分词。

57. He raised his hand ________ the taxi stop. (have)

58. _______ from the top of the hill, our school looks more beautiful. (see)

59. The parents died, _______ him an orphan. (leave)

60. ______ to college, he works very hard. (go)

61. I’m not such a boy as ______ him. (believe)

62. _______ ill, he was sent to a hospital. (be)

注意：A. 非谓语动词作状语时，其逻辑主语通常是句子的主语，如：

（×）Being a fine day, we went out for an outing.

（√）As it was a fine day, we went out for an outing.

（√）It being a fine day, we went out for an outing.

(×) Hearing the news, tears came to my eyes.

（√）Hearing the news, I burst into tears.

（√）When I heard the news, tears came to my eyes.

B．有些非谓语动词可以相当于独立成分、介词或连词使用，这时候它们常有自己固定的形式，与句子的主语不存在任何的逻辑关系，常见的有：

to tell (you) the truth, to be honest, (老实说)

generally / strictly / exactly speaking (一般/严格/准确地说)

including (其中包括……) compared with / to… (与……相比)

所有的非谓语动词都可以作补语，在使用中要注意下面几种情况：

（1）、有许多动词，如：ask, tell, allow, force, cause, encourage, 等之后都可以接不定式作宾语补足语。

（2）、在感官动词notice, observe, feel, hear, listen to, see, watch, look at之后可以接三种非谓语动词作补语，其区别在：_ing作补语表示与谓语动词同时进行的动作，如果这个动作与宾语是被动关系，还要用其被动形式being done；过去分词作补语常表示一个完成被动的动作；不定式作补语可以表示一个全过程、一个具体的、将来的、或经常性的动作。如：

63. I saw the classroom ________ (clean) when I passed by it.

64. The missing children were last seen ______ (play) by the river.

65. I often hear him ________ (sing) in the next room.

66. I saw the room _________ (clean). Everything was put in order.

67. I saw him ________ (open) the door, _______ (walk) into the room, and ______ (sit) down at the desk.

（3）、注意使让动词之后的补语用法：

A．have sb. do sth.==get sb. to do sth. “请/叫/让某人做某事” 与宾语的关系是主动的。

B．have sb./ sth. doing sth.“使某人一直做某事/容许某人做某事”，强调主动和进行。

C．get sb. doing sth.“使某人开始做某事”。

D．have sb./sth. done ==get sb./sth. done“使某人/某物被……或使……遭受……”，表示被动

E．make /let sb. do sth.表主动。

F. make /let sb. /sth. /oneself done 表示被动。

（4）、有些动词后不能接非谓语动词特别是不定式作宾语补足语，常考的动词有：agree, refuse, hope, suggest, demand, etc.

(5)、有些动词后需要接_ing作宾语，而接不定式作宾语补足语，常见的动词有：advise, allow, permit, forbid, encourage等。

例：68.You’d better have someone else _______ (help) you. I’m too busy.

69.He already had his eyes ________ (examine) in the hospital yesterday.

70.The speaker explained it again to make himself _______ (understand).

71.We don’t allow _____ (smoke) in our classroom.

72.He didn’t allow his son _____ (play) computer games.

动词的_ing形式常被用来解释一个名词的具体内容，在句子中充当同位语，如：

His habit, studying at night, remains unchanged.

The gesture for “OK”, making a circle with one’s thumb and index finger, has different meaning in different countries.

一、否定结构：

所有非谓语动词的否定结构都是在非谓语动词前直接加否定词not或never等构成。

例：Excuse me for not coming back in time.

Not having received a reply, He decided to writer again.

He advised me never to go out alone at night.

不定式复合结构是指带有主语的动词不定式，其形式有以下两种：

（1）、for sb. to do sth.(侧重动作), 可以用于各种句子结构中。

（2）、of sb. to do sth.(侧重对逻辑主语品行的评价)，这种结构主要用于下列形容词之后：bad, brave, careful careless, clever, foolish, cruel, kind, rude, polite, stupid等。

73.It’s very important ____ us to learn English well.

74.It’s very foolish ____ you to believe him. == You are very foolish to believe him

75.There are a lot of difficulties ____ them to overcome.

76.I stepped aside ____ her to pass.

由动名词的逻辑主语和动词_ing一起构成，在句子中主要作主语和宾语，其形式有：

注意、A、当句子的主语就是_ing动词的逻辑主语时不能用复合结构。如：

Would you mind opening the door? (You open the door.)

Would you mind my / me opening the door? (I open the door.)

B、_ing作主语放在句首时，只能用第（1）种形式的复合结构。如：

His being ill made us very sad.

C、当无生命的名词或两个以上的名词/代词并列作_ing的逻辑主语时，只能用第（2）种形式的复合结构。如：

Can you hear the noise of the machine running.

Is there any hope of him and his sister winning the prize?

（1）、由“名词或代词主格+动词的_ing形式或过去分词”构成，在句子中作状语，可以表示时间、原因、条件、伴随情况或方式。主要用于句子的主语不是非谓语动词的逻辑主语时。如：

77.All the work_______ (do), he had a rest. （时间状语）

78.Weather ________ (permit), we will go outing tomorrow.（条件状语）

79.The boy stood there, his right hand _______ (raise). （伴随情况）

80.He _____ (be) ill, we sent him to a hospital. （原因状语）

81.There ______ (be) no buses, we had to walk home.（原因状语）

（2）、由“with/without +名词/代词宾格+动词_ing /过去分词/不定式/介词（短语）/形容词/副词”等构成，在句子中可以作状语或定语。如：

82.The murderer was brought in, with his hands _____ (tie) behind his back.

83.With a lot of work ____ (do), I can’t go to the cinema with you.

84.He left without anybody ______ (know).

五、“连接词+ to do”，“when/while/though/unless/if, etc. + done /doing”结构的区别

（1）、“连接词+to do”相当于一个名词的作用，在句中作主语、宾语和表语，常可以转换成由该连词引出的从句。

(2)、“when/while/though/unless/if, etc. + done/doing” 在句子中只能作状语，主句的主语是此结构中doing和done的逻辑主语，如果它们之间的关系是主动的，就用doing，是被动的就用done。

85. Please tell me what _______ (do ) next. ==Please tell me what I should do next.

86. The problem is whether _______ (go) by bus or by plane.

87. When ______ (start) the project hasn’t been decided yet.

88. Be careful when / while ________(cross) the street.

89. When________ (heat), ice will melt.

90. He won’t go to the party unless _______ (invite).

一、省略不定式符号to的情况：

(1).不定式在感官动词notice, observe, feel, hear, listen to, see, watch, look at, 和使让动词have, make, let 之后作宾语补足语时，符号to必须省略。但是当这些动词用于被动语态时，动词不定式变为主语补足语，符号to不能省略。

例：We often hear him sing the song at home.→ He is often heard to sing the song at home.

(2).在动词help之后作宾语或宾语补足语的不定式，符号to可有可无。

(3).两个或两个以上的不定式由连词and / or / than / but 等连接时，从第二个不定式起的符号to常常省略。

例：The students are taught to read, write and do many other things.

例：It’s more difficult to do than to say.

The teacher came not to punish you but to help you.

I wondered whether to stay or to leave.

(4).不定式作表语，用来解释主语部分中do的内容时可以不带to。如：

What we want to do now is (to) lie down and rest.

The first thing she did was go up to her trainer and thank her.

(5).在why或why not引起的表示建议或责问的省略问句中不能带to。

Why quarrel with your mother? Why not join us?

(6).在一些类似情态动词的词组如：had better, would rather … than … , can’t (help / choose) but 等之后的动词不带to。

(7).不定式作but或except的宾语时，若前面有实意动词do / does / did / to do等形式，不带to。如：

I did nothing but / except do my homework last night.

She had nothing to do but wait.

(8).当助动词do / does / did用来加强语气或构成倒装句时，其后的动词不能带to。如：

Seldom does he go home this term. I did tell him the news.

(9).当dare用作实意动词时，后面的不定式有时也不带to，特别是在否定句中。

She didn’t dare (to) ask the teacher.

(10).在美国口语中，用在祈使语气中表示目的，在动词come / try / go / run等之后的不定式可以不带to。如：

Come tell me if he arrives. Go tell your mother. Try open the door again.

二、省略to之后的动词部分的情况：

一般说来，当不定式内容是重复前面的内容时，to后的成分可以承前省略，但要保留符

号to，此时省略的成分相当于do so，这种结构一定要有上文或一定的语境。如：

_ Will you go with me? _ Well, I’d like to.

_ Why didn’t you bring an umbrella with you? _ I meant to, but I forgot about it.

The boy wanted to ride his bicycle in the street, but his mother told him not to.

He can’t eat as much as he used to.

注意：当不定式内容是助动词be / have时，to后要保留原形的be / have。如：

He hasn’t succeeded in the exam, but in fact he ought to have.

She is no longer what she used to be.

1. It shames me to say it, but I told a lie when _______ at the meeting by my boss.

A. questioning B. having questioned C. questioned D. to be questioned

2. Helen had to shout _______ above the sound of the music. (2004 Ⅲ)

A. making herself hear B. to make herself hear

C. making herself heard D. to make herself heard

3. She will tell us why she feels so strongly that each of us has a role _____ in making the earth a better place to live. ()

A. to have played B. to play C. to be played D. to be playing

4. When I handed the report to John, he said that George was the person ______ .()

A. to send B. for sending it C. to send it to D. for sending it to

5. Victor apologized for ______ to inform me of the change in the plan. (2004)

A. his being not able B. him not to be able C. his not being able D. him to be not able

6. _ Mum, why do you always ask me to eat an egg every day?

_ ______ enough protein and nutrition as you are growing up. (NMET)

A. Get B. Getting C. To get D. To be getting

7. The purpose of new technologies is to make life easier, ______ it more difficult. (NMET1999)

A. not make B. not to make C. not making D. do not make

8. European football is played in 80 countries, ______ it the most popular sport in the world. (NMET). A. making B. makes C. made D. to make

9. Don’t leave the water _______ while you brush your teeth. (2004)

A. run B. running C. being run D. to run

10. With two exams _______ , I have to work really hard this weekend. (2004)

A. worrying about B. worried about C. to worry about D. to worry

11. Reading is an experience quite different from watching TV; there are pictures _______ in your mind instead of before your eyes. (2004)

A. to form B. form C. forming D. having formed

12. Sarah, hurry up. I’m afraid you won’t have time to ______ before the party. (2004)

A. get changed B. get change C. get changing D. get to change

13. A cook will be immediately fired if he is found _______ in the kitchen. (2003)

A. smoke B. smoking C. to smoke D. smoked

14. Alice returned from the manager’s office, _______ me that the boss wanted to see me at once. (2004). A. having told B. tells C. to tell D. telling

15. _______ in the queue for half an hour, Tom suddenly realized that he had left his wallet at home. (2004) A. To wait B. Have waited C. Having waited D. To have wait

参考答案：1~5 CDBCC 6~10 CBABC 11~15 CABDC

第二节：1. to be looking 2. to have been working 3. to have invented 4. to have gone

5. to go 6. to understand 7. to wash 8. to be washed

9.to visit 10. to sit 11. to answer 12. to blame

13. to fire 14. to be fired 15. Walking 16. having taught

17.singing 18. having finished 19. joining 20. being invited

21. watering 22. giving 23. being built 24. Given

第三节：26. To refuse 27. Walking 28. Teaching 29. To be

30. To see; Seeing 31. To say 32. Reading 33. to give

34. holding 35. arguing 36. swimming; to swim 37. to go

38. crying 39. to finish; working 40. seeing; to post 41. being paid; to turn 42. missing; to say 43. cheating; to hurt 44. to do; thinking 45. talking; to talk

46. working; to read 47. looking/to be looked; to look 48. visiting; to be visited/being visited 49. To wait 50. to study 51. to do 52. to go 53. to learn

54. teaching; to be 55. to visit 56. moving; moved 57. to have 58. Seen

59. leaving 60. to go 61. to believe 62. Being 63. being cleaned/cleaned

64. playing 65. sing 66. cleaned 67. open; walk; sit 68. help

69. examined 70. understood 71. smoking 72. to play

第四节：73. for 74. of 75. for 76. for 77. done 78. permitting

79. raised 80. being 81. being 82. tied 83. to do 84. knowing

85. to do 86. to go 87. to start 88. crossing 89. heated 90. invited

高三英语复习课件【篇7】

非谓语动词有三种形式：不定式，动词ing形式(v-ing)及过去分词(ed分词)。

不定式的基本形式是由“to+ 动词原形”构成，其否定形式是not to do，不定式可以带自己的宾语或状语，构成不定式短语，没有人称和数的变化，但有时态和语态的变化，不定式在句中可作主语、表语、宾语、定语、状语、补足语，不作谓语。如：

Lucy asked him to turn up the radio.

To make a plan first is a good idea.

1. 动词不定式不失动词的特点，有时态和语态的变化，不定式有六种形式，以write为例：

(1)不定式的时态：

①不定式所表达的动作与谓语动词同时发生或是在谓语动词之后发生，不定式用一般式，如：

It seems that he knows this.

鯤e seems to know this.

I hope that I'll see you again.

鯥 hope to see you again.

②不定式所表达的动作与谓语动词同时发生，并强调动作正在进行的情景，或持续性，不定式用进行式，如：

He pretended that he was listening to English course when I came in.

鯤e pretended to be listening to English course when I came in.

I am very glad that I am working with you.

鯥 am very glad to be working with you.

③不定式的动作发生在谓语动词之前，不定式用完成式，如：

I am sorry that I have put you so much trouble.

鯥 am sorry to have put you so much trouble.

It seems that I have met you somewhere before.

鯥 seem to have met you somewhere before.

④如果强调不定式所表示的动作从过去某一时刻起一直持续到某一时刻，不定式用完成进行时，强调动作的持续性，不强调结果。如：

She seems to have been reading the novel for three hours.

The rain was said to have been falling for a week.

(2)不定式的语态：当不定式的逻辑主语与不定式是被动关系时，不定式一般用被动式。如：

This is the plan to be discussed at today's meeting.

The novel is said to have been translated into several languages.

Whether most countries can use natural energy in future remains to be seen.

(1)不定式作主语：

To say is one thing; to do is another.

To read novels is my hobby.

it形式主语常常代替作主语的不定式，而将不定式或不定式短语放在后面。

To talk with him is a great pleasure.

鯥t is great pleasure to talk with him.

To make electricity by building a dam across the sea is possible.

鯥t is possible to make electricity by building a dam across the sea.

注意：①To see is to believe. 主语和表语都是不定式，不能用it代替：It is to believe to see是错误的。

②To answer correctly is more important than to finish quickly. 而finish与finishing放在than后面都是不合适的，因为前面句子的主语是to answer，后面的主语也要是to finish, 保持than前后句子结构平行。

At that time his job was to write reports for the newspaper.

This suit doesn't seem to fit me.

The problems remain to be unsettled.

(3)不定式作宾语：在下列及物动词后，常跟不定式作宾语：want, need, hope, wish, expect, like, hate, try, manage, forget, remember, know, begin, start, intend, plan, mean, pretend, prefer, agree, refuse, learn等。

To keep the water clean, you need to get some under water plants.

I prefer to stay at home rather than go out.

They have decided to visit the nature park for the milu deer.

注意：不定式作宾语时，有时用“it”替换，it为形式宾语，而将真正的不定式作宾语后置，如：

I found to learn English well not easy.

鯥 found it not easy to learn English well.

I feel to help others my duty.

鯥 feel it my duty to help others.

Jim told me to give his best wishes to everyone here.

What caused you to change your mind?

在被动语态was considered后面，不定式为主语补足语接不定式作宾补和主补的动词常有:

ask, beg, cause, call n, help, force, allow, permit, advise, order, get, want, wish, tell

等。

(其中没有hope sb. to do, suggest sb. to do和agree sb. to do)

注意：①不定式作宾语补足语，在部分感官及使役动词后，用不带to的不定式作宾语，常用的动词有：let, make, have, see, watch, notice, observe, look at, listen to, feel等，help有无to都可以，如：

The teacher had us recite the text every day.

The boss made his men work all the night.

把上面句子变成被动语态后，不定式成为句子的主语补足语，需带to，即在被动语态中不定式一律带to，不存在省略问题。

注意：②在谓语动词think, consider, suppose, believe, imagine, prove, find等后面跟to be作宾补，不跟to do，但其中有些可跟to have done作宾补。如：

Imagine yourself(to be)in his place.

We found him(to be)honest.

suppose…to be/suppose…to have done.

I suppose him to be about fifty.

We suppose him to have stolen it.

(5)不定式作定语：不定式作定语，有时与前面被修饰的名词逻辑上有动宾关系，如果不定式是不及物动词或所修饰的名词是不定式的地点，工具等，不定式后面须有相应的介词，如：

I have a meeting to attend. (attend the meeting)

Pass me a piece of paper to write on. (write on the paper)

在time, place, way后面的不定式省略介词，如：

He had no money and no place to live.

其他不定式作定语情况，如：

I have no chance to go abroad.

They had never moment to rest.

There is a lot of work to do.

=There is a lot of work to be done.

There is no time to lose.

=There is no time to be lost.

但是在下列句子中，不定式主动与被动形式意义不同：

--Have you anything to wash?

--No, nothing. I plan to go shopping.

不定式动作的执行者是you. you wash something

--Have you anything to be washed?

--No, Thank you.

不定式动作的执行者不是you. 是省略了的(…to be washed)by me或by someone else.

I got up early in order to catch the 6∶30 train.

The boy ran all the way so as not to be late.

注意：so as to不能置于句首，in order to可以。

②作原因状语：

He smiled to think of his clever plan.

③在某些形容词后面作状语：

I am glad to see you.

You are sure to succeed.

④作结果状语：

第一, I hurried to the post office, only to find it closed. (出乎意料的结果)

He is too old to read.

The boy is too young to dress himself.

当不定式前的形容词为nervous, pleased, willing, delighted, happy, glad等时，too…to，“to…”可译作肯定，

They are too nervous to leave. 他们急于离开

I am only too pleased to help you.

We are never too old to learn. 活到老，学到老。

第三，形容词/副词enough to do sth.

He was quick enough to catch the ball.

The girl is old enough to go to school.

第四，so…as to/such…as to如此……以致于……

He was so angry that he was unable to speak.

He was so angry as to be unable to speak.

He was such a fool that he believed the cheat.

He was such a fool as to believe the cheat.

⑤不定式作方面状语，不定式作方面状语与句子的主语构成逻辑上的动宾关系，不定式多用主动结构，如果不定式为及物动词，后面不必再跟宾语，如果不定式为不及物动词，要用相应的介词，如：

The mountain is difficult to climb. (动宾关系：climb the mountain)

Lesson Two is easy to learn. (动宾关系：learn Lesson Two)

3. 不定式的逻辑主语：不定式的逻辑主语一般是句子的主语，如He seemed to be reading something, 当需要明确指出不定式动作的执行者时，用for/of sb. (sth. )to do sth. 表示，如：

(1)当作表语的形容词表达不定式的逻辑主语的品行，性格，性质时，要用of，常见的这类形容词有:

brave, careful, careless, kind, nice, good, honest, clever, wise, unwise, stupid, foolish, rude, cruel, silly, thoughtful, impolite, polite, right, wrong, 等。这时It+ be+ 形容词+ of sb. /sth. to do sth. 句型，等于sb. /sth. + be+ 形容词to do sth. , 如：

It is very kind of you to say so.

相当于You are very kind to say so.

It is clever of him to win the competition.

鯤e is clever to win the competition.

It+ be+ 形容词+ for sb. /sth. to do sth. 这一句型中的形容词大多为：

easy, important, usual, difficult, hard, possible, impossible, necessary等。这些词只能说明不定式行为的是与非，不能说明不定式的执行者，所以不等于sb. + be+ 形容词+ to do sth. ，如：

1)It is difficult for beginners to read the book.

不能说：Beginners are difficult to read.

但是第一类，即It+ be+ 形容词+ of sb. to do sth. 句型中的形容词，如right, impolite…等如果强调评论人用of，强调评论行为也可用for，应用情况如下：

(1)当sb. 为泛指时，形容词着重评论不定式行为本身，如：

It was not right for the south to break away from the Union.

(2)当不定式为被动语态时，不定式的执行者常常省略，因此形容词只用来评论不定式行为了。

It was unkind for you to be laughed at.

4. 带疑问词的不定式：动词不定式可以和疑问词what, which, how, where, when, whether等连用，构成不定式短语，如：

The question is when to start.

They haven't ageed on whether to build a factory here or not.

what to say.

I don't know what to write about.

how to do it.

注意：没有if to do和why to do.

I don't know why I should do it. (正)

5. 不定式省略“to”的情况：

(1)当and或or连接同一概念的不定式时，或者当它们之间的关系并列一致时，可将and或or后面的to省去，如：

I'd like to go and see a film.

He had to have a job or go hungry.

但是，有时为了表示对照，或加强语气，则不可以省去to，如：

It is easier to say than to do.

(2)不定式在一部分感官或使役动词后面作宾补省略to。

(3)不定式在but(除了……以外)，except后面的使用，如果but, except前有行为动词do, but, except后省去to，如：

They had nothing to do but wait for the doctor.

The whole night he did nothing except watch TV.

(4)在固定句型中：would rather do…than do…/prefer to do rather than do:

1)The bus was so crowded that I'd rather walk home than take a bus.

2)I prefer to play tennis rather than(play)basketball.

6. “to”代表整个不定式：有时为了避免重复，省去不定式后面的内容，保留到不定式符号to, 如果是to be，保留到be，如：

--Will you please give him a message when you see him?

--I'll be glad to.

--Would you like to go shopping with me?

有时为了强调，也可以不省略。

Do what he or she tell you to do.

动词-ing形式由动词原形+ ing构成。动词-ing形式起到名词、形容词和副词的作用，在句中可作主语、宾语、表语、状语和宾语补足语，但不能单独构成谓语，其构成形式如下，以do为例：

完成时态 having done having been done

Learning English is very important to me.

Having been widened, the road took on a different look.

随着-ing在句子中所做的成分不同，所用的时态和语态有不同的要求，关于-ing的时态和语态的详细使用，在下面ing所作的句子成分中讲述。

1. 动词-ing形式作主语：

Seeing is believing.

有时主语太长，可用it作形式主语，将真正主语放在后面。如：

It is fun swimming in a river or lake in summer.

It is dangerous playing/to play with fire.

但在口语中用动词-ing形式放在句首比不定式多。

Going shopping is a pleasant thing.

②在下列句型中习惯用-ing作主语，不用不定式：

It is no good doing.

It is useless only learning English grammar.

It is no good cutting down the forest.

③在there+ be+ no+ 主语结构中，必须用动词-ing作主语：

There is no telling what will happen in the future.

④主语和表语结构相同，对等。

Seeing is believing.

To see is to believe.

Would you mind my sitting here?

We suggest going out for a picnic on Sunday.

(2)在介词后：

We look forward to seeing you again.

(3)在worth, busy, feel like, look like等形容词后面：

China Daily is well worth reading.

The firefighters were busy putting out the big fire.

They look like winning the relay race.

Suddenly I feel like eating something.

动词-ing做主语或宾语时，一般情况下其逻辑主语为句子的主语，如果需要自己的逻辑主语时，要用物主代词或名词所有格+ 动词-ing，如：

His/Li Ping's coming late, made the teacher unhappy.

Would you mind my/me smoking here?

当动词-ing不在句首时，可用人称代词宾格，名词普通格代替，但逻辑主语为无生命的名词，或泛指时，用普通格，如：

We heard the noise of desks being opened and closed.

3. 不定式与动词-ing作宾语的比较：

(1)在下列一些动词后面常跟动词-ing作宾语，而不跟不定式：

admit, appreciate, advise, avoid, allow, consider, delay, dislike, enjoy, escape,

excuse, face, feel like, finish, fancy, forbid, forgive, imagine, include, keep, mention,

mind, miss, practice, resist, risk, suggest等。如：

He practices speaking English every day.

He admitted having broken the window.

I much appreciate your giving me the chance.

She dislikes doing housework.

He enjoys nothing but playing the computer.

(2)在下列一些动词后只跟不定式，不跟动词-ing作宾语：

want(想要)，hope, expect, wish, decide, would like, refuse, manage, pretend, demand,

offer, afford, plan, wonder, intend…等，如：

I am expecting to get a letter from my parents.

We are planning to build another research center.

I'd like to buy a new car made in the U. S. A.

(3)在下列一些动词后面跟不定式或动词-ing形式作宾语，意义不同，如：

I remember doing this exercise before.

我记得以前做过这个练习。

Remember to post the book for me.

记住帮我把那本书寄走。

We shall never forget hearing Jackson singing.

我们忘不了听杰克逊唱歌的情景。

Don't forget to give my regards to them.

I'll try to improve my pronunciation.

我要努力去纠正，提高我的发音。

Since no one answered the front door, why not try knocking at the back door?

既然前门没人答应，为什么不试试后门呢?

I suggest we stop working and have a rest.

我建议我们停下干活，休息一会儿。

They stopped to listen, but there was no more sound.

他们停下来，听一听，再没什么声音。

What do you mean to do with your old bicycle?

你打算如何处理你那辆旧自行车?

I won't wait if it means delaying a week or so.

如果这意味着要推迟一星期左右，那我就不等了。

(4)在love, like, hate, prefer后面跟不定式和动词-ing形式无多大区别，如：

Do you like to eat ice-cream?

I like traveling very much.

I like driving(do drive)fast cars.

(5)在start, begin后面，一般接不定式和动词-ing形式无多大区别，在下列情况下，多用不定式：

①自然界变化：

It started to rain.

Snow started to melt as spring came.

②心理活动，在understand, know, realize等词前面：

I began to understand my mother's feelings.

③begin, start本身为进行时：

Mother was starting to cook in the kitchen when I got home.

(6)在allow, advise, permit, forbid等动词后面，有名词或代词作宾语，用不定式做宾语补足语，如果没有宾语，直接用-ing形式，如：

1)We don't allow parking here.

2)The police don't allow people to park here.

3)He advised me to get an English pen friend.

4)I advise seeing more English films.

(7)need, require, want译作“需要”时，跟动词-ing作宾语，主动表示被动，相当于to be done，如：

The windows require cleaning.

The windows require to be cleaned.

The patient needs operating on at once.

The patient needs to be operated on.

The flowers want watering.

The flowers want to be watered.

(8)在一些固定表达中用动词-ing形式，不用不定式：

can't help doing, be worth doing, devote…to doing, look forward to doing, be/get/become used to doing, object to doing, thank…for doing, excuse…for doing等。

Einstein devoted his life to making a research in science.

I'm looking forward to getting your letter.

We are used to living in the countryside.

4. 动词-ing在句中作表语：

Our plan is setting up a new car factory.

My job is teaching/driving.

这类词作表语，起解释说明主语的作用，主表可颠倒：Teaching is my job. 转换成问句，用what提问：

--What's your job?

--My job is teaching.

--How is your job?

--It is interesting.

--How was your trip?

--It is tiring, but interesting.

5. 动词-ing作定语：

(1)表示被修饰名词的用途：

There are two reading rooms in our school library.

a reading room其含义是A room is used for reading.

The swimming pool in our school is nearly completed.

the swimming pool其含义是The pool is used for swimming.

(2)如果动词-ing形式作定语表示被修饰的名词发出的一个正在进行的动作或某种特征行为，这时被修饰的名词与动词-ing逻辑上有主谓关系，如果是主动关系用doing, 被动关系用done, 或being done表达，另外有时间要求：

第一种情况：主动关系，-ing形式与谓语动词同时进行，或经常发生，用doing，如：

Look at the dancing girl. She is one of my classmates.

Look at the girl who is dancing. ….

China is a developing country.

China is a country that is developing.

注意：①如果动词-ing形式表示的动作发生在谓语动词之前，一般不用having done作定语，而用定语从句表达，如：

The teacher criticized the boy having broken the window. (误)

The teacher criticized the boy who had broken the window. (正)

注意：②如果表达的是未来发生的动作，或含有情态概念，用不定式表达，如：

I have a meeting to attend today.

鯥 have a meeting that I will attend today.

Mary is the proper worker to do the job.

鯩ary is the proper worker who can do the job.

第二种情况：被动关系：动词-ing表达的动作与谓语动词同时发生，正在进行，用being done; 发生在谓语动词之前，完成了的动作用done；发生在谓语动词之后，未来的动作，用to be done. 如：

The bridge being built now is two kilometers long.

鯰he bridge that is being built now is two kilometers long.

The bridge built last year is two kilometers long.

鯰he bridge that was built last year is two kilometers long.

The bridge to be built next year will be two kilometers long.

鯰he bridge that will be built next year will be two kilometers long.

6. 动词-ing作宾语补足语和主语补足语：经常在see, hear, feel, watch, notice,

observe, find, get, look at, listen to, keep, leave, send, set, catch等一些动词后面用动词-ing作补语，其中宾语和宾语补足语在逻辑上有主谓关系，如果主谓关系是主动的，又表示动作在进行，或状态的持续，用doing; 如果主谓关系是被动的，又表示动作在进行，用being done，如：

I noticed them repairing the car.

鯳hen they were repairing the car, I noticed.

I noticed the car being repaired.

鯳hen the car was being repaired, I noticed.

如果宾语和宾补是主动关系，又表示动作的全过程，即完成或一般时态，宾补用不定式to do表达(在某些动词后面不定式不带to)；如果是被动关系，又表示动作的全过程，即完成时态用done表达，如：

I often notice them repair the car.

I noticed the car repaired.

如果把上述句子变成被动语态，宾语补足语就变成主语补足语了。

7. 动词-ing形式作状语：动词-ing形式作状语时，要求其逻辑主语必须是句子的主语，句子的主语与动词-ing形式逻辑上有主谓关系。如果主谓关系是主动的，用主动语态；-ing动作与谓语动词同时发生用一般式doing, 如果-ing动作发生在谓语动词之前，用完成式having done, 如：

Walking along the street, I met a friend of mine.

相当于When I was walking along the street, I met a friend of mine.

Having finished their work, they had a rest. 相当于After they had finished their work, they had a rest.

如果主谓关系是被动的，用被动语态；-ing动作与谓语动词同时发生，用done；如果-ing动作发生在谓语动词之前，已完成的动作，用被动语态的完成式having been done, 如：

Having been cleaned and decorated, our classroom took on a new look.

相当于After our classroom had been cleaned and decorated, our classroom took on a new look.

Well known for his expert advice, he was able to help many people.

相当于As he is well known for his expert advice, he was able to help many people.

注意：-ing形式做状语时，如果-ing形式需要自己的逻辑主语，人称代词用主格，名词用普通格，如：

Mother/She being ill, he had to stay home to look after her.

It being Sunday, the shops are crowded.

过去分词由动词+ ed构成，起到形容词和副词的作用，在句中可作状语、表语、定语和宾语补足语。过去分词的性质是被动，完成，但有时侧重程度，有时侧重被动，不及物动词变成的过去分词无被动的意义，过去分词形式由动词原形加词尾-ed构成，及部分不规则的词如：done, played.

①侧重程度：

boiling water 沸水 fallen leaves落叶

boiled water 凉开水 frozen chicken冷冻鸡

②侧重主、被动：

a broken glass, a dancing girl, a damaged house.

1. 过去分词的作用：

(1)过去分词作状语：同动词-ing形式作状语一样，过去分词的逻辑主语是句子的主语，如是被动关系，又与谓语动词同时发生，或无一定时间对比，用过去分词，如：

Seen from the top of the mountain, the lake looks like a mirror. (相当于The lake is seen)

相当于When the lake is seen from the top of the mountain it looks like a mirror.

Heated, water can turn into vapor.

相当于If it is heated, water can turn into vapor.

(2)过去分词作表语：

We are interested in science.

(3)过去分词作定语：过去分词作定语，有时间要求，发生在谓语动词之前，即完成的动作，用done，而不用having been done.

The bridge built last year is 2 kilometers long.

People invited to the party are most scientists.

(4)过去分词作宾补：

I noticed the car repaired.

2. 过去分词与动词-ing形式的区别：

(1)作表语和定语的区别：动词-ing形式表示事物对人造成的影响，事物是主动的，常译成令人……，使人……；过去分词表示人对事物的看法产生的心理反应，人是被动的，常译作：感到……如：

The news is surprising.

We are surprised at the news.

这类词很多，如：inspiring, inspired, astonishing, astonished, tiring, tired,

moving, moved, disappointing, disappointed, worrying, worried, encouraging, encouraged, …….

(2)作宾补的区别：宾语与宾补逻辑上有主谓关系，主动用动词-ing或不定式表达，被动用being done或done表达。

We found him standing outside the door.

He found the door locked.

(3)作状语的区别：用作状语的动词，与句子的主语逻辑上有主谓关系、主动用-ing形式，被动用过去分词。

The boy entered the room, followed by a dog.

相当于The boy entered the room and he was followed by a dog.

The boy entered the room, following his father.

相当于The boy entered the room and followed his father.

(4)-ing形式与ed分词都可以作状语，表示时间、条件、原因、伴随、结果、让步、程度，如：

Having brought her father back to England, Lucy helped him to get better. (时间)

After she had brought her father back to England, Lucy helped him to get better.

Disturbed by the noise, we had to finish the meeting early. (原因)

We had to finish the meeting early because we were disturbed by the noise.

Born a free man, he was now in chains. (让步)

Though he was born a free man, he was now in chains.

(If) bitten by a snake, you should send for help and not walk. (条件)

鯥f you are bitten by a snake, you should send for help and not walk.

The boy ran in, carrying a ball in his arm. (伴随)

鯰he boy ran in and carried a ball in his arm.

He dropped the plate, breaking it into pieces. (结果)

鯤e dropped the plate and broke it into pieces.

(5)-ing形式与ed分词的否定式，由not+ -ing构成：

Not knowing how to do it, I asked him for help.

高三英语复习课件【篇8】

SeniorⅢ Unit4 Green World Integrating Skills

一、教学思路：

1 . 高考阅读理解的特点是所选材料题材多样化，记叙文、说明文、议论文、应用文等特色鲜明，内容涉及科普、社会、文化、政治、经济、历史等各个方面，文章阅读量大。主要考查考生综合运用所学知识获取信息、整理信息、理解信息以及处理信息的能力。测试的主要要求是：

①．掌握所读材料的主旨和大意，以及用以说明主旨和大意的事实和细节。

②. 既能理解具体的事实，也能理解抽象的概念。

③．既能理解字面的意思，也能理解深层的含义，包括作者的态度、意图等。

④．既能理解某句，某段的含义，也能理解全篇的逻辑关系，并据此进行推理和判断。

⑤．既能根据所提供的信息去理解，也能结合中学生应有的常识去理解。

根据这五项要求，我们可将阅读理解题归纳为以下几种题型：细节理解题，词句理解题，主题、主旨题，猜测词义题，推理判断题。

2．高考的要求就是我们平时课堂教学训练的方向。高中英语课文内容包罗万象、题材广泛、体裁各样、语言知识丰富。除了要让学生掌握英语基础知识外，我们更可以利用课文的教学，精心设计问题，按照高考的要求有针对性地对学生进行问题解答训练，提高学生的阅读速度，培养学生的阅读理解能力。

二、教材分析：

本课是第四单元综合技能部分的课文，介绍了达尔文和其他科学家关于物种的研究和他们的成果。内容涉及到遗传学和基因学的知识，文章有一定难度。是本单元主题绿色世界的一个延伸，又为本单元紧接的写作训练作铺垫。

三、教学法分析：

1、问题教学法。精心设计问题，以问题为主线，在提出问题和解决问题过程中，培养学生阅读理解能力。设疑与提问是英语教学课堂调控的常规武器。它是促进师生之间信息交流反馈，推动教学流程迅速向前拓展的重要契机。

2、 “自上而下的模式”。这是哥德曼（Goodman）提出的阅读理论模式。按这个模式，阅读者在阅读过程中不是逐字、逐句地去理解，而是结合自己的预测，在文章中找出有关的信息，来验证自己的预测。由于强调整体篇章理解，在阅读时采取跳跃式搜索、猜测等方法，所以有利于培养学生快速阅读理解能力。

四、学生分析：

两个班学生基础有限，学习英语有兴趣但没功底。成绩差距较大。尤其对文章缺乏整体感知能力，对深层次问题无从下手，信息的获取和分析能力都较弱。

五、教学目标及重难点：

由于本课教学以发展学生解决问题能力为主，不设知识目标与情感目标。能力目标亦即重难点：

1、培养学生快速获取信息解决表层次问题的能力；

2、培养学生深层思考，培养信息重组、推理分析判断能力。

七、教学步骤：

1． Lead in: Show two pictures on the blackboard:

2. What are differences between them? Why?

Maybe we can find the answer to this question in our text.

2. Fast reading: Open the book, read through the text. Find out:

How many scientist are mentioned in the text?

S：There are three. They are:

Charles Darwin Gregor Mendel Gote Turesson

T：So how many parts can we divide the text? (划分段落，整体感知)

T: Could you find the main idea of each paragraph?

学生做完这个步骤后，我总结并用幻灯打出：

Part I (Pa1-3): Darwin and his research.

Part II (Pa4-5): Mendel and his experiment.

Part III (Pa6): Turesson and his study

Part IV (Pa7): the importance and significance of the research of the three

3. Careful reading: (1) Show a slide of a table, ask the student to read the passage again, fill in the following:

Scientists Research/experiment Result

(用图表的形式处理文章信息，既避免问题提出的形式重复，又方便学生整体快速把握文章的重点段落)

(2) (完成以上整体表层次训练后，通过幻灯片打出以下问题，再细部理解文章)

Finish the following exercises:

1. What led to his writing of the famous book On the Origin of species?

A. The study of physics, chemistry, and botany.

B. What he had observed on the voyage.

C. His expedition on the Beagle to the Galapagos.

2. Why did the wildlife of the Galapagos Isles deserve special attention?

3. What does “these” in “of these” in Para 2 mean?

4. “those” in Para 2 Line 4 refers to ________

A. the different islands B. the life forms C. differences D. the species

5. What was the purpose of Mendel’s experiments?

A. His purpose was based on his love nature.

B. His purpose was to support the ideas concerning the influence of

environment upon plants.

C. His purpose was based on the influence of environment upon plants.

6. The research by Darwin, Mendel and Turesson shows that______

A. genetics is more important than the environment to plants

B. genetics is less important than the environment to plants

C. both genetics and the environment are important to plants

D. neither genetics nor the environment is important to plants

7．What was Darwin’s new theory according to the text?

(以上问题有深有浅，既有符合高考的细节理解题(如第1题)，词句理解题(如第3、4题)，推理判断题(如第7题)，设计时更因答案的不唯一性(如第1题BC均正确)，增加了题目的灵活性和难度。在解答过程中特别强调：

第1题：选项在文章中都有出现，但未必就是答案。题目不难，容易上当。

第3题：培养学生联系上下文准确把握词句意义，这道题目难度不大，但出奇的是学生正确率并不高。

第4题：这与第3道题是一样的，但难度较大。这两道题的题型在高考中经常出现。

第7题：这道题很难。考查学生对文章事实的延伸理解，训练学生根据文章事实作出推理判断的能力。是一道深层次理解推理判断题。)

(3) Answer the last question:

What do you think is the relationship between the title “Wildlife and Garden

Roses” and the text?

（这个问题非常难！也是整节课的精华部分，解决分析这个问题我花了十多分钟时间。问标题和文章的关系并不新鲜，关键是这个标题用得非常好，借此我分析了高考中常考的一类题目：给文章找标题。完成这个问题既是对整篇文章的概括理解，又是对高考常考题型解题技巧的一次传授。）

Wildlife shows the influence of environment while Garden of Roses shows the

science of genetics.

八、 Homework:

1. Read the text.

2. Learn the language points by yourselves

Charles Darwin Gregor Mendel Gote Turesson

the influence if the environment the science of genetics

1、高中英语课文应该怎么教？又要教什么？这一直让我思考。我想很多英语老师对课文当中的语言知识是绝对不会漏的，但是不是通过课文的教学培养和训练学生的阅读技巧和阅读能力了呢？也许因为时间，也许因为方法，可能落实不太好。尤其在高三，课文没有出现新的语法点，怎样通过课文的教学达到这一目的，以利学生高考，更值得我们思考。

2、提问是一门艺术，也是一种教学方法。苏联教育界倡导的一种教学方法就叫问题教学法，已成为有世界影响的教学方法之一。问题是思维的向导，合适的课堂提问，往往能把学生带入一个奇妙的问题世界，使学生积极思考问题，寻求解决问题的途径和答案，从而培养学生分析问题和解决问题的能力。布鲁斯乔伊斯说过：“教会学生独立思考，我们就给了他们自我教育的能力。” 课文教学未必要设很多的问题，但要典型；其次问题分析要透彻，分析一个问题就要教会学生一种技巧或是让学生有一次能力的锻炼。问题设计是否巧妙，问题分析是否精当，就是判断这种课好坏的依据。

高三英语复习课件【篇9】

（2）能力目标：熟练掌握阅读理解的考核项目及解题思路、备考策略。

（3）情感目标：揭开阅读理解的神秘面纱，使学生树立信心，从容应对。

教学难点：如何从对整篇文章的把握，对特定细节以及复杂句子的理解方面提高学生的归纳、推理、判断能力，选出最佳选项。

教学方法：演绎归纳法。通过对此题型的讲解和归纳，使学生能够更容易从方法上去把握，从练习中去体会其解题的规律。

广东省高考英语阅读理解题的考查目的:

高考阅读理解要求考生在20分钟左右的时间内，完成对三篇不同题材、体裁文章的理解。另外，今年还增加了信息匹配题。要求考生在5分钟左右的时间内，完成对一篇文章有关信息的筛选和匹配。阅读理解考查的不仅是考生对整篇文章的把握能力，还考查了他们快速捕捉信息、准确理解特定细节以及复杂句子的能力；考生不仅要理解文章的表层意思，更重要的是要通过文章的表层去合理推断、挖掘文章的隐含意义、延伸意义。这是对考生能力、智力、心理的一个综合检验。阅读理解的好坏在很大程度上决定着英语考试成绩。

高考阅读理解试题的类型主要分为四种：细节理解题、推理判断题、猜测词义题和主旨大意题。它们常见的提问形式如下：

Which of the following (statements) is TRUE/not TRUE?

According to the passage, who(what, where ,when, why, how, etc,)…?

The following are mentioned EXCEPT______?

Why does the author say…?

Where in the passage does the author describe…?

It can be inferred from the passage that______

It can be included from the passage that_____

We can draw a conclusion that_____

We can learn from the passage that____

The underlined word “hit”( in paragraph 1) probably means___

What does the underlined part“reimburse you” probably mean?

By saying “it is all worth it” in the last paragraph ,the author means that ______

What is the main idea of the passage?

The best title for the passage might be____

The main purpose of the passage is to _____

The passage mainly tells us /is mainly about___

我们结合《英语周报》高三广州专版第30,31期的专题复习内容研以及配套的例题分析(见《英语周报》),针对高考阅读理解的四种主要题型,给学生做解题策略指导和技巧总结.

策略指导：先浏览一遍题目，把题目的要求储存在大脑中，带着疑问去快速阅读，然后找出与题目相关的信息词句加以理解分析，去伪存真。此种办法能有效地避免做细节理解题时的失误。

【技巧总结】准确捕捉信息，注意对信息进行综合分析，分清主次、真伪，避免受信息的干扰，陷入高考题所设下的“陷阱”，误选干扰项，因为某些干扰选项在文章中也能找到“依据”，具有很强的迷惑性。

策略指导：深层含义通常是隐藏在文字背后的延伸之意，弦外之音，如作者的意图、倾向、语气，人物的性格、心理、情感，故事的结局，事情的因果关系等。因此大家需调动自己的逻辑思维能力，透过字里行间，去严密推理，合理想象。

【技巧总结】隐含信息并非“空穴来风”，而是“有源之水”，即隐含信息也是以文章的语言为载体。大家应准确捕捉信息，调动智力因素，严密推理，合理想象，忌“凭空想象 ”或“断章取义”。在阅读理解中结合自己的常识进行判断是必要的，但决不能以常识取代信息分析。推理判断既要严密，又要灵活。

策略指导：首先从词汇所处的语境进行分析，注意上下文之间的关系，如：如果出现that is, that is to say或破折号等，我们可以断定，后面的内容是对前面内容的解释；如果出现转折词but, however, yet以及表示相反结果的on the contrary, on the other hand等，我们可以从所给内容相反的意义去考虑。

【技巧总结】高考语意判断题很多都是考查旧词新义的理解。因此大家需把词汇或短句的字面意义与语境和上下文结合起来，选择最切合文章内容，最符合上下文逻辑的意义，切忌望文生义。

策略指导：读完一篇短文后应有意识地回味一下文章的大致内容，理一理文章的脉络，体会一下段与段之间的内在联系，这样做文章的中心一般都能概括出来, 涉及文章主旨大意方面的题目自然会在头脑中由模糊变清晰。

【技巧总结】我们在归纳文章主题时，一定要注意选项的内涵和外延必须能恰如其分地概括文章的主题，既不能范围过大，也不能把某一细节或侧面误当作主题。阅读时我们还应注意捕捉文章出现频率较高的中心词汇以及文章和段落的主题句。在选择文章题目时，还应注意语言方面的特点：文章题目往往具有凝练、醒目的特点。

猜测词义是从特定的角度考查考生的阅读理解能力和处理生词的能力。猜测词义包括对词、词组和句意的理解，是高考英语试题阅读理解中的一类必考题。猜测词义题常见的解题方法：

任何一篇文章中的句子在内容上都不是绝对孤立的，都跟句子所在的段落及整篇文章有关。利用上下文提供的情景和线索，进行合乎逻辑的综合分析而推测词义，是阅读过程中的一大关键，也是高考的热点。

如：If he thinks he can invite me out, he is all wet. I don’t like to be with him.

A. drunk B. sweating C. happy D. mistaken

分析：根据I don’t like to be with him我们感受到说话人的语气。我不愿意跟他在一起，那么，他要邀请我出去是不可能的他就大错特错了。因此答案D。

阅读文章中的有些生词尤其是新闻报导及科普类文章中的生词，往往在其后有对该词进行解释说明性的短语或句子，如to be, that is , mean, stand for, namely, to refer to, to mean ,in other words等，有时也以同位语、定语从句的形式出现，或用破折号、括号来表示。

如：Some ships carried cargo such as coal, oil and military supplies(军用物资),while others carried only passengers.

分析：such as后所列举物品均为“货物”，由此推断cargo的意思相同，和后面的passengers形成对比。

有的文章作者为了增强表达效果，会用一对反义词揭示事物的不同点，形成鲜明的对比，这时只要把握其中的一词，就不难推出另一词的含义，这种句子多见unlike, although, but, yet, while, on the contrary, on the other hand, for one thing, for another, instead of, rather than等信息词。如：One idea about business is that it can be treated as a game of perfect information. Quite the reverse, business polite, life itself is games which we must normally play with very imperfect information.

A. Quite right. B. Time enough. C. Most unlike. D. Just the opposite.

分析：由前句中perfect information到后面imperfect information这一组对比关系的词，我们可以推断应为“对比、相反”的意思。

常见的引出同义词的标志性词语有or, like, similarly等。如：

Millions of animals die each year on Us roads, the Highway administration reports. In fact, only about 80 ocelots, an endangered wild cat exist in the US today. The main reason? Roadkill.

分析：从后面的同位语an endangered wild cat可知“ocelot”是一种野生猫

某些冷僻的词汇后面会举一个例子，使词汇具体易懂。等连接性词语往往用来举例说明前面较难理解的名词。

如：You can take any of the periodicals: The World of English, Foreign Language Teaching in School, or English Learning.

分析：通过后面的例子：《英语世界》、《中小学外语教学》、《英语学习》，可知periodicals为“期刊杂志”

阅读中常会遇到一些由所熟悉的单词派生或合成的新词，可利用构词法知识来推测其意思。

如：Exhibition officials said that a person bitten by one of these snakes would need at least 80ml of an anti-poison medicine to be saved.

分析：anti-poison 是由poison加前缀anti-构成的，anti-意思是“反对、排斥、抵抗”，由此可猜出anti-poison是“解毒、抗毒”的意思。

5. 结构复杂的长句子出现在阅读理解中往往造成大家心理上的紧张，有时读了好几遍还不知道句子的意思，白白浪费了时间,如何对待阅读理解中的长句子?

策略指导：阅读理解中的结构复杂的句子一般分为两大类：第一类是由复合句或并列句构成的长复杂句子；第二类是省略句。对于第一类句子，大家应抓其主干成分，理解其主体意思，其他的成分都是对主体意思的修饰和补充。对于第二类句子，大家应通过上下文找出省略成分，把句子补充完整。

【技巧总结】结构复杂的句子往往出现在说明文或议论文中，这是造成考生心理紧张的主要原因。大家应冷静下来，结合文章所说明或议论的中心话题，抓住主干，层层理解。

主要考察学生的速读能力，即在有限的时间内理解、总结信息并且能快速找到相关的信息的能力。学生要学会寻读（scan），抓关键信息，然后进行匹配。

Step 3 Homework and consolidation exercises

1. 《英语周报》高三广州专版第30,31期的专题复习内容。

2. 《英语周报》高三广州专版第33-34期的年高考英语模拟试题（一）--（十二）一共12套。

3. 和2007年全国各地的英语高考试题中的阅读理解。

阅读理解旨在考查考生理解总体和特定信息的能力。

任何一篇文章都有一个主旨要义。有时从文章的第一个段落甚至第一个句子即可以得出文章的主旨要义。从这个段落或句子，读者可以知道文章描述的是谁或什么即文章的主题，也会了解作者希望读者了解主题方面的哪些内容。有时，文章的主旨要义则需要从文章的字里行间进行推断。这类试题主要考查考生的略读文章、领会大意的能力，有时候它

对考生的归纳、概括能力有一定的要求。

一篇文章的主题和中心确定之后，还需要有大量的细节信息支持。这些细节对于理解全文的内容至关重要，同时也是归纳和概括文章中心思想的基础，因而不容忽视。

正确理解文章中单词或短语的含义是理解文章的第一步，也是理解文章的基础。不懂得单词的含义根本就谈不上理解文章。但是，有时候英语单词的含义并非等同于词典上标注的汉语意思，其含义随不同的语境会有所不同。根据上下文正确理解灵活多变的词义，

才算是真正初步具备了一定的阅读理解能力。

在实际阅读活动中，有时候需要根据文章提供的线索和事实，进行逻辑推理，推测作

者未提到的事实或某事情发生的可能性。

英语文章讲究主题段和主题句。主题段通常在文章的开头，主题句可能在某一段的开头、中间或结尾，作用是交代该段的中心思想，再由全段展开或讨论这个意思。段与段之间通常有词语连接，承上启下，使文章行文连贯。如果希望准确、深刻地理解一篇文章，必须对文章的结构有所了解，把握住全文的文脉，即句与句、段与段之间的逻辑关系。对

这种能力的考查一般反映在文章的中心思想、文中某段的大意或指代关系的题目中。

每篇文章都有一个特定的写作目的，或是向读者传递某个信息，或是愉悦读者，或是讲授某个道理。而这些信息通常不是明确表达出来，而是隐含在文章之中。因此，这类问

题要求考生在理解文章总体的基础之上，去领会作者的眼外之意。

下面结合2007年广东高考阅读理解试题，具体分析对这些能力的考查：

How should one invest a sum of money in these days of inflation (通货膨胀)? Left in a bank it will hardly keep its value, however high the interest rate. Only a brave man, or a very rich one, dares to buy and sell on the Stock Market. Today it seems that one of the best ways to protect your saving and even increase your wealth is to buy beautiful objects from the past. Here I am going to offer some advice on collecting antique clocks, which I personally consider are among the most interesting of antiques.

I sometimes wonder what a being from another planet might report back about our way of life. “The planet Earth is ruled by a mysterious creature that sits or stands in a room and makes a strange ticking sound, it has a face with twelve black marks and two hands. Men can do nothing without it's permission, and it fastens its young round people's wrists so that everywhere men go they are still under its control. This creature is the real master of Earth and men are its slaves. ” Whether or not we are slaves of time today depends on our culture and personality, but it is believed that many years ago kings kept special slaves to tell the time. Certain men were very clever at measuring the time of day according to the beating of their own hearts. They were made to stand in a fixed place and every hour or so would shout the time. So it seems that the first clocks were human beings.

However, men quickly found more convenient and reliable ways of telling the time. They learned to use the shadows cast by the sun. They marked the hours on candles, used sand in hourglasses, and invented water-clocks. Indeed, any serious student of antique should spend as much time as possible visiting palaces, stately homes and museums to see some of the finest examples of clocks from the past.

Antique clocks could be very expensive, but one of the joys of collecting clocks is that it is still possible to find quite cheap ones for your own home. After all, if you are going to be ruled by time, why not invest in an antique clock and perhaps make a future profit?

41. According to the passage, collecting antique clocks______.

A. can hardly keep the value of your savings

B. will cost much of your savings

42. By quoting (引用) the remark of a being from another planet, the author intends to________.

A. suggest human beings are controlled by a clock

B. describe why clocks can rule the planet Earth

C. tell readers what clocks look like

D. compare clocks to human beings

43. Which of the following is NOT mentioned as a way to measure the time?

A. Counting the beating of one's own heart.

B. Making use of candles, sand and water.

C. Observing shadows cast by the sun.

D. Keeping slaves busy day and night.

44. The underlined phrase “stately homes”in paragraph 4 means________.

B. houses in very good condition

C. grand houses open to the public

D. houses where statesmen meet regularly

45. The purpose of the passage is_______.

A. to introduce the culture of antique clocks

B. to offer some advice on collecting antique clocks

C. to compare different ways to make a future profit

D. to explain convenient and reliable ways of telling time

[导读] 这是一篇叙议结合的散文。人们在通货膨胀的今天应该怎样投资一笔钱呢？存在银行里，这笔钱几乎不能够保值，无论存款利息多么高。只有勇敢的人或是富有者才敢于在股票市场买卖。今天保护你的储蓄甚至增加你的财富最好方法之一似乎是购买过去遗传下来的漂亮的物品。因此，作者顺理成章地提出一些关于收藏古董闹钟的忠告，奉劝人

们投资收藏古董闹钟以便将来盈利。

Key: 41. C 42. A 43. D 44. C 45. B

41. C。细节事实理解题。收集闹钟可以增加你的财富。根据第1段的句子：Today it seems that one of the best ways to protect your saving and even increase your wealth is to buy beautiful objects from the past. Here I am going to offer some advice on collecting antique clocks, which I personally consider are among the most interesting of antiques. 今天保护你的储蓄甚至增加你的财富最好方法之一似乎是购买过去的漂亮的物品。这里我打算提供一些关于收集古董闹钟的忠告，我个人认为它们是最令人感兴趣的古董之一。再看最后一段最后一句：After all, if you are going to be ruled by time, why not invest in an antique clock and perhaps make a future profit?别忘了，如果你打算受时间制约，请投资收藏古董闹钟以便将

来盈利吧？

42. A。深层含义理解题。作者引用外星人的话，目的是为了说明人类被闹钟所控制。根据第2段的引文意思：有时候我想知道一个外星人关于我们的生活方式可能会反馈回去的报告内容是什么。“地球这个行星被神秘的动物控制，这种动物坐在或站在一个房间里并发出一种奇怪的滴答声，它有一张脸，脸上有12个黑色的标记，还有两只手。如果没有它的命令人们什么事情也不做，并且它把它那年轻的圆圆的人们的手腕系得紧紧地，这样，无论人们走到那里，都处于它的控制之下。这个动物是地球的真正的主人，人是它的

” 奴隶。

43. D。细节判断题。A项与第2段的下列句子吻合：Certain men were very clever at measuring the time of day according to the beating of their own hearts.; B项与第3段的下列句

子吻合：They marked the hours on candles, used sand in hourglasses, and invented water-clocks；C项与第3段的下列句子吻合：They learned to use the shadows cast by the sun.；D项的含义是：“让奴隶日夜忙碌”，这与第2段的下列句子不一致：... but it is believed that many years ago kings kept special slaves to tell the time.但是人们相信许多年之前国王们畜养了专用的奴隶来辨别时间。

44. C。词义猜测题。state-owned houses国有的房子；houses in very good condition状况良好的房子；grand houses open to the public对公众开放的宏伟的房子；houses where statesmen meet regularly政治家们经常集会的房子。根据第4段的信息词student, visiting palaces和museums判断，认真研究古董的学生应该尽可能多花时间参观宫殿、宏伟的房

子和博物馆，可以看见一些过去遗传下来的最精致的闹钟的珍品。

45. B。写作意图题。作者的写作目的是为了提出一些关于收藏古董闹钟的忠告。见第1段句子：Here I am going to offer some advice on collecting antique clocks, which I personally consider are among the most interesting of antiques. 这里我打算提供一些关于收藏古董闹钟

的忠告，我个人认为它们是最令人感兴趣的古董之一。

Do you want to live with a strong sense of peacefulness, happiness, goodness, and self-respect? The collection of happiness actions broadly categorized as “honor” help you create this life of good feelings.

Here's an example to show how honorable actions create happiness.

Say a store clerk fails to charge us for an item. If we keep silent, and profit from the clerk's mistake, we would drive home with a sense of sneaky excitement. Later we might tell our family or friends about our good fortune. On the other hand, if we tell the clerk about the uncharged item, the clerk would be grateful and thank us for our honesty. We would leave the store with a quiet sense of honor that we might never share with another soul.

Then, what is it to do with our sense of happiness?

In the first case, where we don't tell the clerk, a couple of things would happen. Deep down inside we would know ourselves as a type of thief. In the process, we would lose some peace of mind and self-respect. We would also demonstrate that we cannot be trusted, since we advertise our dishonor by telling our family and friends. We damage our own reputations by telling others. In contrast, bringing the error to the clerk's attention causes different things to happen. Immediately the clerk knows us to be honorable. Upon leaving the store, we feel honorable and our self-respect is increased. Whenever we take honorable action we gain the deep internal rewards of goodness and a sense of nobility.

There is a beautiful positive cycle that is created by living a life of honorable actions.

Honorable thoughts lead to honorable actions. Honorable actions lead us to a happier existence. And it's easy to think and act honorably again when we're happy. While the positive cycle can be difficult to start, once it's started, it's easy to continue. Keeping on doing good deeds brings us peace of mind, which is important for our happiness.

46. According to the passage, the positive action in the example contributes to our .

47. The author thinks that keeping silent about the uncharged item is equal to .

48. The phrase “bringing the error to the clerk's attention” (in para. 5) means .

A. telling the truth to the clerk

C. asking the clerk to be more attentive

D. reminding the clerk of the charged item

49. How will we feel if we let the clerk know her mistake?

A. We'll be very excited.

B. We'll feel unfortunate.

C. We'll have a sense of honor.

D. We'll feel sorry for the clerk.

50. Which of the following can be the best title of this passage?

D. Happiness through Honorable Actions

[导读] 这是一篇说理、规劝性的议论文。本文的中心是：作者提倡通过高尚的行为获得幸福，规劝人们多行善事获得幸福，以形成一种美丽的积极的循环。高尚的思想行为可以使你的生活具有一种和平感、幸福感、善良感和自尊感。过高尚行为的生活可以创造美丽的积极的循环。高尚的思想导致高尚的行为。高尚的行为致使我们幸福的生存。当我们幸福的时候，我们容易产生高尚的思想和行为。虽然积极的循环难以开启，但是，一旦开启，就容易继续下去。坚持不断地做善事会给我们到来平静的心理，这样做对我们的幸福

46. A。细节事实理解题。第5段第6-8句：In contrast, bringing the error to the clerk's attention causes different things to happen. Immediately the clerk knows us to be honorable. Upon leaving the store, we feel honorable and our self-respect is increased.比较而言，把这个错误引起这个职员的注意导致几件事情发生。职员立刻知道我们是高尚的（honorable）。我

们一离开商店，就感觉到是高尚的，并且我们的自尊在增加。

47. B。细节事实理解题。第5段第1-2句：In the first case, where we don't tell the clerk, a couple of things would happen. Deep down inside we would know ourselves as a type of thief. 在第一个案例中，我们不告诉那个职员，有几件事情会发生。在内心深处我们会知道我们

自己就是小偷。

48. A。句子意思猜测题。第5段分两层意思。第1-5句是第一层意思：在第一个案例中，我们不告诉那个职员，有几件事情会发生。在内心深处我们会知道我们自己就是小偷。在这个过程中，我们的心理会失去平静，也失去自尊。我们也会证明我们不可以信赖，因为我们通过告诉家里的人和朋友的方式来忠告我们的耻辱。第5段第6-8句是第二层意思：比较而言，把这个错误引起这个职员的注意导致几件事情发生。职员立刻知道我们是高尚的（honorable）。我们一离开商店，就感觉到是高尚的，并且我们的自尊在增加。通过对比这两层意思，可以判断bringing the error to the clerk's attention意思是“实话告诉这个职

员”。

49. C。细节事实理解题。第5段第7-8句：Immediately the clerk knows us to be honorable. Upon leaving the store, we feel honorable and our self-respect is increased. 职员立刻知道我们是高尚的（honorable）。我们一离开商店，就感觉到是高尚的，并且我们的自

员”。

50. D。归纳标题。结合第1段和最后一段，并综合全文，我们可以得知：通过高尚的行为获得幸福。过高尚行为的生活可以创造美丽的积极的循环。高尚的思想导致高尚的行为。高尚的行为致使我们幸福的生存。当我们幸福的时候，我们容易产生高尚的思想和行为。虽然积极的循环难以开启，但是，一旦开启，就容易继续下去。坚持不断地做善事会

给我们到来平静的心理，这样做对我们的幸福很重要。

Malaria, the world's most widespread parasitic (寄生虫引起的)disease, kills as many as three million people every year ---- almost all of whom are under five, very poor, and African. In most years, more than five hundred million cases of illness result from the disease, although exact numbers are difficult to assess because many people don't (or can't) seek care. It is not unusual for a family earning less than two hundred dollars a year to spend a quarter of its income on malaria treatment, and what they often get no longer works. In countries like Tanzania, Mozambique, and the Gambia, no family, village, hospital, or workplace can remain unaffected for long.

Malaria starts suddenly, with violent chills, which are soon followed by an intense fever and, often, headaches. As the parasites multiply, they take over the entire body. Malaria parasites live by eating the red blood cells they infect (感染) .They can also attach themselves to blood vessels in the brain. If it doesn't kill you, malaria can happen again and again for years. The disease is passed on to humans by female mosquitoes infected with one of four species of a parasite. Together, the mosquito and the parasite are the most deadly couple in the history of the earth and one of the most successful. Malaria has five thousand genes, and its ability to change rapidly to defend itself and resist new drugs has made it nearly impossible to control. Studies show that mosquitoes are passing on the virus more frequently, and there are more outbreaks in cities with large populations. Some of the disease's spread is due to global warming.

For decades, the first-choice treatment for malaria parasites in Africa has been chloroquine, a chemical which is very cheap and easy to make. Unfortunately, in most parts of the world, malaria parasites have become resistant to it. Successful alternatives that help prevent resistance are already available, but they have been in short supply and are very expensive. If these drugs should fail, nobody knows what would come next.

51. According to paragraph I, many people don't seek care because .

C. they can remain unaffected for long

D. there are too many people suffering from the disease

52. People suffering from malaria .

A. have to kill female mosquitoes

B. have ability to defend parasites

C. have their red blood cells infected

D. have sudden fever, followed by chills

53. Which of the following may be the reason for the wide spread of the disease?

A. Its resistance to global warming.

B. Its ability to pass on the virus frequently.

C. Its outbreaks in cities with large populations.

D. Its ability to defend itself and resist new drugs.

54. It can be inferred from the passage that .

A. no drugs have been found to treat the disease

B. the alternative treatment is not easily available to most people

C. malaria has developed its ability to resist parasites

D. nobody knows what will be the drug to treat the disease

55. Which of the following questions has NOT been discussed in the passage?

A. How can we know one is suffering from malaria?

B. How many people are killed by malaria each year?

C. Why are there so many people suffering from malaria?

D. What has been done to keep people unaffected for long?

[导读] 这是一篇介绍医学科普常识的说明文。本文主要介绍疟疾病的起因、传播、危害与治疗。疟疾（Malaria）是世界上传播最广泛的寄生虫引起的病，每年都要使三百万人致命--几乎全是5岁以下的孩子，并且是贫穷的非洲人。疟疾病本身有很多基因，对于各种新药物具有抵抗性，所以目前还没有找到根治疟疾病的最佳治疗方法和药物。

51. A。细节事实理解题。见第1段第2-3句：... because many people don't (or can't) seek care. It is not unusual for a family earning less than two hundred dollars a year to spend a quarter of its income on malaria treatment, and what they often get no longer works. (多年来，有5亿多病例由这种病引起的，虽然确切的数字难以估计，) 因为许多人不去寻求（或不可能）医疗护理。这种情况对于一个年收入不到200美元的家庭并非不同寻常，因为要治疗疟疾病，

就花去年收入的四分之一，并且他们时常所得到的不再有效。

52. C。细节事实理解题。见第2段第3句：Malaria parasites live by eating the red blood cells they infect (感染) .疟疾寄生虫依靠吃他们感染的红血球生存。这说明疟疾病患者的红

血球受到感染。

53. D。细节事实理解题。这种疾病之所以广泛传播是因为它有一种自我防御和抵抗新药物的能力。见第2段倒数第3句：Malaria has five thousand genes, and its ability to change

rapidly to defend itself and resist new drugs has made it nearly impossible to control.。

54. B。推理判断题。根据第3段倒数第2句：Successful alternatives that help prevent resistance are already available, but they have been in short supply and are very expensive. 一些成功的可供选择的化学药品在阻止疟疾的这种抵抗力方面已经出现效用，但是这些可供选

择的化学药品非常短缺，并且昂贵，因此大多数人不容易得到可供选择的治疗。

55. D。细节事实理解题。A项见第2段第1句：Malaria starts suddenly, with violent chills, which are soon followed by an intense fever and, often, headaches；B项见第1段第1句：... kills as many as three million people every year almost all of whom are under five, very poor, and African.；C项见第2段第3句：Malaria has five thousand genes, and its ability to change rapidly to defend itself and resist new drugs has made it nearly impossible to control.；又见第1段第2

句：... because many people don't (or can't) seek care.；D项没有提到。

高三英语复习课件【篇10】

1.利用课文的词、句复习，训练学生的组句能力。从词和句入手，将每个单元课文的词和句与基础写作结合起来，是培养和提高学生的英语能力的有效途径。这不仅能帮助提高学生记忆和灵活应用词汇的能力，而且还有助于训练学生语句表达的正确性。

(1)归纳词汇和句型，帮助学生建立对词、句使用的感性认识。写作是一种语言的输出形式，只有大量的语言输入，语言输出才有可能;只有积累了一定的感受和大量的语言素材，写作才有可能进行。为了帮助学生记忆课文中的单词和短语，达到积累语言素材，掌握基本语法知识与语句结构的目的，教师可以从训练学生归纳每个单元课文中出现的重要词汇、短语和常用句型入手，使学生对句型结构的认识更加清楚，并对词、句的使用语境形成感性的认识。

(2)操练词汇和句型，训练学生的记忆和使用词、句的能力。为了使学生掌握和应用课文中所学词汇和句型，教师应为学生创设多层次的练习活动，拓宽写作的.训练途径。教师可采用将学生从课文中归纳的词汇、句型进行词类转换、习惯用法、句型转换、完型填空、写短文等形式的训练，帮助提高学生的记忆和使用词、句的能力。

二、借鉴课文词、句进行仿写。

通过提供情景让学生模仿造句，不仅可以降低写作难度，而且可以增加学生写作的兴趣、自信和成就感，使学生的遣词造句的能力在实践中得到提升。

三、借鉴课文句型，训练写作多种表达与技巧，拓展学生思维。

教师在教学实践中会发现，学生在基础写作中往往出现句式雷同、语句呆板、行文单一等现象，缺乏用5个句子有效表达和传输信息的能力。因此，教师就有必要继续进一步加强句子多样化表达、句子转换替代、句子合并等训练，教会学生使用不同的短语、句型结构表达同一的意义;同时，还让学生明白写作的逻辑原则:一个句子表达的信息量越多，而且使用的句子越精练、清楚，那么句意表达和传输信息就越有效。

四、利用课文体裁，训练学生谋篇布局的能力。

教师会发现高三学生在写作中存在的另一个问题是层次不清、结构散乱以及逻辑性不强，这是因为学生缺乏谋篇布局的能力。针对这方面问题，教师可以在教学中利用课文的体裁进行文章结构方面的训练以及进行句子、段落间的连接训练。

高三英语复习课件【篇11】

dip into here and there in a word once again look out for above all refer to shut up key to in other words take turns look over one’s shoulder remind sb. of offer(n.) fix a date for on one’s way to show sb. around have a gift for offer…to lead to so long as hear sb.’s advice value(v.) call in after all eat up report sb. to sb. work out

Will you come to…?

Yes, I’d love to…

Would you like to…?

Yes, that’s very kind/nice of you.

I’d like to invite you to…

I’d love to, but…

I apologize… Never mind.

Please excuse me… It’s not important.

I ought to… Don’t worry.

What a shame! Forget it !

She swallowed the medicine with the help of some water.

她用水把药送下去了。

He just swallows his food; he is always in a hurry.

他吃饭狼吞虎咽，总是这么匆忙。

I haven’t read that book properly. I’ve only dipped into it.

我没有好好读那本书，仅随便翻阅一下。

I’ve only dipped into politics.

我对政治研究不深。

In a word, I don’t trust him.

总这，我不信任他。

Tom is brave, careful and calm. In a word, he is admirable.

汤姆既勇敢、细心又镇静。总之，他很令人羡慕。

无被动结构，也不用进行时态。下列单词和词组也无被动形式：appear, disappear, happen, take place, break out等。

The house belongs to him.这所房子归他所有。

The book belongs to my deskmate.

这本书是我同位的。

5.be likely to 易于……；有可能的.

后跟动词不定式，往往用在一时的情形。

I shall be likely to catch cold if I go out tonight without my overcoat.

如果今晚不穿大衣出去，我会感冒的。

Is that magazine likely to interest you?

那本杂志对你有吸引力吗？

6.get a general idea of 对……了解大意（大概情况）

Read the chapter quickly to get a general idea.

快速阅读这一章，了解大意。

I have a general idea of that town.

e across=meet with(meet…by chance/accident)无意中碰到，找到，想到

Perhaps I shall come across him somewhere in the park.

也许我会在公园的某个地方遇到他。

He came suddenly across an idea.

他突然有了一个好主意。

In other words, they failed to pass the exam.

换句话说，他们考试没有及格。

He became, in other words, a great hero.

也就是说，他成了一位大英雄。

9.take turns = take in turns轮流（做某事）

The two boys took turns at digging the hole.

这两个男孩轮流来挖坑。

The three men took turns to drive so one would not be too tired.

这三个人轮流开车，因此，就不会有人过于疲劳了。

You’d better talk things through. I will listen with complete attention.

你最好把话讲完。我会专心听的。

If I had enough time, I would have talked things through.

如果有足够的时间，我会把话说完的。

11.on one’s way to…正在到……，动身往……，在往……的路上

He was on his way to school when suddenly a policeman stopped him.

他正在上学的路上就在这时一个警察截住了他。

They telephoned to say that they were on the way, but they might be late.

他们打电话说他们正在路上，但他们可能来晚。

I called on a friend of mine on my way back.

我在回来的路上拜访了我的一个朋友。

You mustn’t forget to call in at Brown’s on the way home.

你千万别忘了在回家的路上到布朗先生家拜访。

拓展：by the way顺便说；in the way挡道；in a way 某种意义上；lose one’s way迷路；by way of 途经，经由；work one’s way 通过苦干……；no way决不；make one’s way 前进；all the way to…一路至……

He told a lively story about his life in Africa.

他讲述了一个有关他的非洲生活的一个生动故事。

Young children are usually lively.

friendly 友好的；lovely可爱的；orderly井然有序的；comradely同志般的；motherly母亲般的；daily每天的；weekly每周的；monthly每月的；yearly每年的；lonely寂寞的，偏僻的；deadly致命的；likely可能的。

对比：alive(1)活着的：可以作表语，这时可与living互换；作定语时，只能作后置定语。

He was alive when he was taken to the hospital.

他被送往医院时还活着。

Although he is old, he is still very much alive.

虽然年老了，但他仍十分活跃。

live（1）（动、植物）活着的，作前置定语；如：a live fish一条活鱼

Her grandfather is still living at the age of 93.

她爷爷已经93岁了，仍然健在。

He made a lot of money by playing music.

他演奏音乐挣了很多钱。

It is very easy to make money in that city.

在那个城市挣钱很容易。

零钱，找头：change 伪钞：counterfeit money, bogus money

(2)由money构成的短语：

lose money 亏本；for love or money无论如何；

put money into… 投资于；put money on… 在……上打赌；

spend money like water挥金如土；earn good money赚大钱

(3)由money构成的谚语：

Money makes the mare go.有钱能使鬼推磨。

Money talks.金钱万能。

Time in money.一寸光阴一寸金。

14.lead to(prep.)+n./v-ing引起，造成，导致

Too much work or too little rest often leads to illness.

过度工作或很少休息经常导致疾病。

Difference of opinion led to a heated argument.

意见分歧导致了激烈的争论。

15.so song as/as long as 只要……

You will succeed so long as you work hard.

只要你努力就会成功。

It is a good idea to start a part-time job.

做一项兼职的工作是个好主意。

16.in time及时(=not later than),终究(=sooner or later)

I hope you will arrive in time for the meeting .

我希望你及时到会。

Work hard and you will succeed in time.

努力工作那么最终你将成功。

17.affect（=have an effect on sth.）vt.影响（effect n.影响）

This may affect your health.

这或许会影响你的健康。

My throat is always affected by bad weather.

我的嗓子总是受恶劣天气的影响。

18.be ready to do sth.（=be willing to do sth.）乐意做某事

Tom is always ready to help others.

汤姆总是乐于助人。

If I’ve made any mistake, I’m ready to apologize.

如果我有错误，我愿意道歉。

19.play a trick on sb.= play with sb.捉弄某人，耍弄计谋

He is always playing tricks on others.

他总爱捉弄别人。

Don’t play tricks on me. I want to know the truth.

别耍我，我想知道真相。

Have you used up you money?

你的钱用完了吗？

常用短语：eat up吃光；tear up撕掉；use up用光；lock up锁住；burn up烧光；get up起床；up and down上上下下，来来往往。

-How long at this job?

-Since 1990.

A. were you employed B. have you been employed

C. had you been employed D. will you be employed

分析：B。since指从过去某时开始到现在一直进行的动作或所处的状态，应用现在完成时态。

By the end of last year, another new gymnasium in Beijing.

A. would be completed B. was being completed

C. has been completed D. had been completed

分析：D。“by the end of last year”到去年年底，是过去的过去，故用过去完成时。

Someone called me up in the middle of the night, but they hung up

I could answer the phone.

A. as B. since C. until D. before

题4 -How are the team playing?

-They’re playing well, but one of them hurt.

分析：A。got hurt受伤，get 后接过去分词表示被动。受伤的事发生在过去，需用一般过去时。

-I’m sorry I’m calling you so late.

- okay.

A. This is B. You’re C. That’s D. I’m

分析：C。此题考查道歉与应答，That’s okay.这晨相当于That’s all right.（没关系）。

-What happened to the priceless works of art?

- .

A. They were destroyed in the earthquake

B. The earthquake was destroying them

C. They destroyed in the earthquake

D. The earthquake destroyed them

分析：A。问句的重点在那些珍贵艺术品的遭遇，所以回答的重点应放在它们所处的情况上，适合用被动态。

After supper she would sit down by the fire, sometimes for an hour, thinking of her thinking of her young and happy days.

A. as long as B. as soon as C. as much as D. as many as

分析：A。指时间“长达”应用as long as 表达。

I was really anxious about you. You home without a word.

A. mustn’t leave B. shouldn’t have left

C. couldn’t have left D. needn’t leave

分析：B。shouldn’t have done表示本不该做某事，而实际上做了。

高三英语复习课件【篇12】

一、请根据下面的提示和要求写一篇说理文。

提示：

(1) 英语是世界上使用最广泛的语言之一。讲英语的人近三亿。

(2) 英语是国际会议中使用得最多的工作语言。世界上有百分之六十的电台和百分之七

十的邮件（mail)用英语。数以百万计的书籍和杂志是用英语写的。

(3) 借助英语可以更快、更好地学习现代科学和技术。学好英语，我们可以更好地为祖国服务。

Why Do We Study English?

English is one of the most widely used languages in the world. It is spoken by nearly three hundred million people： in England, the United States, Australia, Canada and many other countries. It is one of the working languages at international meetings and is more used than the others. It is said that 60 percent of the world's radio broadcasts and 70 percent of the world's mail are in English. Millions of books and magazines are written in English, too. English is really a bridge to knowledge. With the help of English we can learn modern science and technology faster and better form the developed countries. In this way we can serve our country better.

二、请根据下面的提示和要求写一篇文。

提示：

(1) 不少学生可能抽烟，学生中抽烟的人数还在增多。

(2) 一份调查报告透露，某校有五分之二以上的学生抽烟，有些学生甚至偷了钱买烟。

(3) 对中学生来说，抽烟的危害比成年人更大。抽烟不仅有害于身体，还有害于思想。

(4) 中学生是国家未来的建设者。抽烟的学生该下决心戒烟了。

请根据上面的提示，写一篇题为“Give Up Smoking”的短文，字数约120个。

Smoking is a widespread habit even among school children. The number of young smokers is increasing.

It is reported that over two-fifths of the students in a certain school smoke, and some of them even steal money to buy cigarettes, This is terrible.

As we all know, smoking is harmful to our health. But it's even more harmful to middle school students for it does great harm not only to their health but also to their mind.

Middle school students are future builders of the country. They should spend their time learning what is useful. So it's really time that these young smokers made up their minds to give up smoking.

三、

假设你是李红，你的一位美国笔友Robert写E-mail问及你高考后暑假的`安排，请根据以下要点，写一封100词左右的email回复他, 可以适当增加细节。1. 学开车 2. 参加英语培训课程 3. 去北京看奥运会 4. 游览北京的名胜

注意：1.根据以上内容写一篇短文，不要逐句翻译，可适当增加细节以使行文连贯。

2.要准确使用语法和词汇；使用一定的句型、词汇，清楚、连贯地表达自己的意思；3. 词数：100个左右。开头已给出，不计词数。

(One possible version)Dear Robert:

How time flies! The happy days we shared often shines in my memory. What about youAs you know, my college entrance exam is approaching, which also announces the end of this sort of pressing study life. However，I

intend to have a meaningful summer vacation. First, I will learn to drive to get a driving license, which is a new activity for a high school graduate in China. I will have a good rest, enjoying my hobbies. Then I will take some English courses to improve my English communication ability, With the Olympics beginning, I will be a participant of it, watching the basketball match between

China and the US. I have been dreaming of Kobe’s performance long. After that,

I will pay a visit to some tourist attractions to widen my horizon. That is the plan for my vacation. I am looking forward to being told about your arrangements of vacation. Give me your quick reply soon, OK Best wishes!

这是一篇提纲式的议论文写作素材，探讨国计民生的社会热点话题：粮食价格上涨。写作时要注意避免逐句翻译，并适当增加细节以使行文连贯。

Hello, everyone,

Now I’ll tell you something about our research project The World Food

Crisis on behalf of our group. As you know, food shortages have hit many countries in the world and even caused social uest in some areas. But who is responsible for the current world food crisisFirst, annual world grains output has declined because of climate change. Then lots of farmland has been lost due to the rapid development of industry and urbanization. Besides, faced with the rising energy prices, people have turned to the production of biofuels, which has worsened the severe situation.

Then what should we do to deal with the problemOn one hand, we should focus on the environmental protection and improve the ecology. On the

other hand, strict measures should be taken to protect farmland. Of course, to

build a harmonious world the developed countries should take their responsibilities to help the poor ones experiencing food shortage.As for me, I will call on the people around me to live thriftily. And for the

moment, I think, we should study hard to develop science and help solve the food shortage in the future.

高三英语复习课件【篇13】

英语写作是高考考试要点，下面让我们来看看英语写作基础知识点之句子的知识点归纳！

☆定语和状语（时间、地点等）都属于附加成分，在基本句型中一般都不列出。

☆时态包含于句子中，任何句子都有时态。

It will rain tomorrow.

He often runs in the morning.

They cried.

Tom exercises every day.

I miss my mother very much.

She wants to go home now.

The English club is going to hold an English party.

They all love her.

The music sounds wonderful.

The leaves have turned red.

She is a student.

We keep silent about that.

主语＋谓语(及物动词)＋间接宾语（人）＋直接宾语（物）：S+V+IO+DO

The teacher gave a book to him.=The teacher gave him a book.

They told me an interesting story.

The waitress offered me a bottle of wine.

My father will buy me a bike.=My father will buy a bike for me.

Miss Smith teaches us English.

主语＋谓语(及物动词)＋宾语＋宾语补足语： S+V+O+C

They call me Xiao Wang.

I saw him swimming in the river.

We elected him monitor of the class.

1．In other words，we are the master of our own future.

2．This morning our teacher told us something about the Hope Project in class.

3．A blind man was walking slowly and carefully with a stick in his hand.

4．Should we sacrifice our children’s future for our own interests?

5．Friends made my life full of excitement, imagination and romance.

6. The sun sets in the west.

7. My dictionary is in the bookcase.

8. Rainy days make me sad.

9. Tom often hears his sister singing in the next room.

10. She has not received a letter from her boyfriend for a long time.

11. The woman showed her husband a picture.

12. The student offered a seat to the old man.

13. Mr. Green taught us how to use the Internet.

14. Going to bed early and getting up early is a good habit.

15. He is becoming stronger and stronger.

16. He gave up smoking at last.

17. The plane takes off at 8:30 a.m.

18. All of them laughed.

19. Everybody likes Andy Lau.

高三英语复习课件【篇14】

英语写作基础语法是怎么样的？各位同学，我们一起看看下面，一起阅读吧！

It will rain tomorrow.

He often runs in the morning.

They cried.

Tom exercises every day.

I miss my mother very much.

She wants to go home now.

The English club is going to hold an English party.

The music sounds wonderful.

The leaves have turned red.

She is a student.

We keep silent about that.

主语＋谓语(及物动词)＋间接宾语（人）＋直接宾语（物）：S+V+IO+DO

The teacher gave a book to him.=The teacher gave him a book.

They told me an interesting story.

The waitress offered me a bottle of wine.

My father will buy me a bike.=My father will buy a bike for me.

Miss Smith teaches us English.

主语＋谓语(及物动词)＋宾语＋宾语补足语： S+V+O+C

They call me Xiao Wang.

I saw him swimming in the river.

We elected him monitor of the class.

2024站小学课件(合集7篇)

每一名教师在课前都需要认真设计好教案和课件，现在正是教师开始准备教案和课件的时候了。学生的学习成效与教师的教案密切相关。我们向您推荐几篇必读的“站小学课件”资讯文章，希望能给您带来一些启示。感谢您一直以来对我们的支持和信任，希望您能继续关注我们的网站！

站小学课件篇1

【教学内容】

北师大版二年级上册第二单元第1课时

【教学目标】

1.结合具体的购物情境，认识小面额人民币，知道1元＝10角，1角＝10分。

2.经历购物过程，感受1元的实际价值，并会进行简单的计算，积累购物经验。

3.了解人民币与日常生活的密切联系，感受人民币的实用价值，懂得要爱护人民币。

【教学重、难点】

教学重点：认识小面额的人民币，了解并掌握元、角、分之间的关系。

教学难点：正确使用人民币及准确进行元、角、分之间的关系。

【教学准备】

人民币的模型（课本附页1）、ppt课件。

【教学过程】

一、创设情境，引出问题。

1.创设情境：买文具，需要人民币。

（1）观察人民币，交流辨认方法。

纸币：根据小写数字和“圆”、“角”字可以分别辨认“5元”、“2元”、“1元”、“5角”、“2角”、“1角”。注意大写数字“伍”“贰”“壹”的写法。

硬币：找出数字，看清元、角还是分，就能确定面值。

（2）师生小结：元、角、分是人民币的三个单位。

（3）兑换人民币，掌握单位关系。

根据日常生活经验和兑换人民币、数一数的操作活动，知道元、角、分之间的关系：

1元＝10角

1角＝10分

（4）引出问题：

买1支钢笔可以怎样付钱？

用1元买1把尺子，应找回多少钱？

1元正好可以买哪些物品呢？

二、解决问题，探索新知。

问题一：买1支钢笔可以怎样付钱？

1.独立思考，寻找方法。

2.组织交流，多种付法。

根据1元＝10角，得到各种不同的付钱方法。

（1）付10张1角。

（2）付2张5角。

（3）付1张5角、1张2角、3张1角。

（4）付1张5角、2张2角、1张1角。

（5）付5张2角。

问题二：用1元买1把尺子，应找回多少钱？

1.理解题意，交流思路。

1把尺子8角，要求从1元中减去8角，还剩下多少钱。

2.应用换算，简洁表达。

1元＝10角

10－8＝2（角）

答：应找回2角。

问题三：1元正好可以买哪些物品呢？

1.理解题意，交流思路。

“正好”的意思是物品的价格加起来刚好是1元，不多也不少。

2.巩固换算，交流买法。

根据1元＝10角，得到各种不同的买法。

（1）买2支铅笔：5＋5＝10（角）

（2）买1把尺子和1本练习本：8＋2＝10（角）

（3）买1把尺子和2个橡皮擦：8＋1＋1＝10（角）

（4）买5本练习本：2＋2＋2＋2＋2＝10（角）

3.教师小结：人民币上有国徽和祖国的秀丽山水，我们都要爱护人民币。

三、练习应用，巩固提升。

1.换一换。

2.填一填。

注意：可以先把元和角分开算，再合起来。比如第3小题，3个1元是3元，5角＋5角＝1元，5角＋1角＝6角，所以3元＋1元＋6角＝4元6角。

四、全课总结，拓展延伸。

元、角、分之间有什么关系呢？你能在生活中正确地使用人民币去购物吗？

站小学课件篇2

顶碗少年教学设计-小学语文教案

教学目标：1、让学生认识并了解情节曲折的方法“一波三折”，体会它的作用。

2、初步学习“一波三折”的构思方法。

教学重点：让学生认识并了解情节曲折的方法“一波三折”，体会它的作用。

教学难点：初步学习“一波三折”的构思方法。

教学准备：ppt课件学生阅读材料

教学过程：

一、导入

1、出示：唐伯虎的《祝寿诗》，你在读这首诗时，心理有什么变化？

2、唐伯虎的这首诗不仅打动了当时的听众，也打动了所有读这首诗的人。

文学上，把这种构思叫做“一波三折”。

二、感悟《顶碗少年》的一波三折

1、出示学习提示：

（1）概括《顶碗少年》的故事情节；

（2）用折线图和文字来表示；

（3）设想：如果这场杂技表演一次就成功了，还会给读者留下这样深刻的印象吗？

交流答案：

杂技表演第一次表演失误，观众惊呆

第二次表演失误，观众让让演下一个

第三次表演成功，响起雷鸣般掌声

2、在《顶碗少年》中，哪些情节的描写使你觉得文章更曲折？

教师出示：做事---失败----做事-----失败-----做事-----预期目标

三、感悟《卡罗尔和她的小猫》中的一波三折

1、出示学习提示：

（1）概括《卡罗尔和她的小猫》的故事情节；

（2）用折线和文字表示故事情节；

（3）登广告后发生意外，让你体会到什么？

学生交流：

卡罗尔一直想要一只小猫。登广告，送来许多猫

免费送猫，一只也没了

伯洛跑出来

站小学课件篇3

一、教学目标

【知识与技能】

创设情境走进春天，了解春天给自然界带来的变化，知道春天的常用色彩及春天的活动，利用各种方法表现春天。

【过程与方法】

引导学生感知、欣赏春天的美，提高色彩感受能力和对色彩的识别能力，用绘画的形式表现春天的景色及人和动物的活动。

【情感态度和价值观】

充分激发学生的学习热情和热爱大自然、热爱生活的情感，培养学生善于发现、大胆表现、乐于交流、勇于创新的精神。

二、教学重难点

【重点】

观察春天的色彩变化和各种人与动物的活动，用绘画的方法表现出来。

【难点】

感受春天的色彩、运用绘画的形式表现春天。

三、教学过程

环节一：播放歌曲，导入新课

我们先来听一首歌曲，你可以跟着音乐唱起来也可以动起来。你知道这首歌唱的是什么吗?(欣赏歌曲《春天在哪里?》)

冬去春来，鸟语花香，春趣盎然。今天就让我们跟着春姑娘一起到大自然中去，看一看春天的景色吧!顺势导入新课《走进春天》

环节二：感受春天，尝试发现

(一)感受春天

下面我们一起欣赏春天的美景，教师利用多媒体播放春天的画面。你看到了什么?你从哪些地方感觉到春天来了? 新精神。

能力：尝试用手撕彩纸、用水彩笔、油画棒绘画以及剪刀和胶水等工具和材料，通过想想、看看、画画、做做等方法，自由、大胆地把所感所想表现出来。

情感：体验各种绘画工具和不同材料的使用效果，认识常用色。

教学重、难点

重点：学生可以通过用撕贴和绘画的手法共同完成一幅美丽的天空剪贴画或绘画作品。

难点：尝试用不同的材料和方法自由、大胆地把所感所想表现出来。

教学准备：彩色卡纸、范画。

学具准备：彩色卡纸、绘画工具、胶水（剪刀）

教学过程：

一、交流导入

同学们今天老师要带大家去一个特别的地方，请大家插好自己想象的翅膀，闭上眼睛，竖起小耳朵仔细听，用心感受：就很快到达目的地。老师描述：我们身边有洁白的云朵在笑着和小朋友们打招呼，一行大雁嘎嘎的叫着在向我们告别，它们要去南方过冬了，同学们能猜到我们到了哪儿呢？（引导学生进入今天的主题：天空）今天同学们就和老师一起飞向我们美丽的天空。（出示课题：美丽的天空）

二、教授新课

1、认识天空的色彩

根据季节、时间、天气的不同，天空会呈现出不同的色彩，老师面前有一些色卡纸，请大家选一选，你见过的天空什么颜色的呢？引导：大家仔细想想，晴朗的天空—蓝色、夜晚的`天空—黑漆漆的、日出或者日落时的天空是一片金色……

（学生自由进行选择）确定几个颜色的卡纸贴在黑板上。

2、认识天空中的事物

我们每个人都有好朋友，美丽的天空也从来不寂寞，它的朋友可多了，瞧（鸟、白云、跳伞的人，太阳下山月亮出来了、焰火……）老师在黑板上画出：小鸟、白云、热气球、太阳、等……

3、认识艺术中的天空

老师：同学们我们用发现的眼睛看到了天空的很多朋友。让我们看看俄罗斯绘画大师康定斯基的《蓝天》，看看他是怎样用彩笔描绘美丽的天空的好吗？请大家打到课本第16页。

A、欣赏大师的作品：康定斯基《蓝天》

天空在生活中如此美丽，在大画家的艺术作品中就更富有想象力和创造力了，看蓝天上漂浮着五彩缤纷的图形，有的像木马、飞鸟、乌龟……在画家的笔下，天空是多么的有趣和生动呀！

B、欣赏小画家的撕贴天空作品

刚才我们不但欣赏了非常棒的大画家用绘画的方式表现了我们的天空，一年级的同学们也不甘示弱，他们用灵巧的小手也完成了一幅幅活灵活现的天空图，请看第17页同学们的作品。

老师：这些小画家又是用什么方法表现的天空呢？

学生：撕纸（撕贴）和剪贴

三、学生实践

同学们是不是也想要快快完成啦，那请听要求：我们用画的方法每人来完成一幅《美丽的天空》好吗?

学生实践，老师巡视辅导，协助学生剪贴。

四、展示、评比

每小组选出好的作品请同学占到讲台上一起欣赏。

站小学课件篇4

一、教学内容：

1、加减法的意义。

2、10以内数的加减运算。

3、连加、连减和加减混合运算。

4、解决有关的简单实际问题。

二、教学目标：

1、经历自主探索算法并与同伴合作交流计算方法的过程。

2、在具体情境中，通过操作活动，初步理解加减法的意

义，探索并掌握10以内数加减法的计算方法。

3、能正确计算得数是10以内数的加与减及连加、连减和

加减混合，并能解决生活中有关的简单实际问题。

三、教学重难点：

1、能正确、熟练地进行10以内数的加减运算。

2、能正确理解加与减的意义，并能运用加与减解决简单

的实际问题。

四、基本训练内容：

1、在具体情境中，理解加与减的意义。

2、通过操作、画示意图、演示等多种方式，探索和交流

算法。

3、注重数的认识和运算意义有机结合，促进学生对数的

认识。

五、教学具准备：

教具：课件，实物投影仪，计数器等

学具：各种图形，棋子等。

课题：一共有多少

（共2课时，第1课时）

教学目的`：

1.在具体的情境活动中，让学生体验加法的含义，并学会5以内

数的加法.

2.初步培养学生提出问题，解决问题的能力。

教学重难点：

1.知道加法的含义，并能正确地读出算式。

2.会计算5以内的加法。

站小学课件篇5

内容简析：

分数在生活化数学和形式化数学中都有着广泛的应用。本课是在学生对分数的生活化感知的基础上，进行最初步的数学化的整理和概括。本课主要学习“几分之一”的分数，了解它的产生和应用，会读会写，知道各部分名称，会进行简单比较。本课的知识看似简单，但对学生来说是数的认识的突破（从整数向非整数的突破），是认知结构上的新建，是思维上的一次飞跃。本课的学习将对认识“几分之几”的分数产生直接影响，对日后建立完整的“分数意义”有着特别重要的启始作用。

设计理念：

我以“动态生成”和“活动学习”的教学理念为指导思想设计本课教学的。从学生的原有认知基础出发，让学生运用平日积累的生活经验和认知体验，动手“创造”分数，在讨论交流活动中学习新知，目的在于想充分展示新知的趣味性和奥妙无穷，让学生一接触到就能喜欢上，从而萌发进一步探究的欲望，这才是我们的目标，这才是新课程积极倡导的教育教学观；更想寻求“生本”、“互动”、“生成”、“开放”的课堂教学模式的新突破和新建构。

教学目标：

1、通过动手操作、合作交流等活动，让学生了解分数“几分之一”的产生，了解它的含义；会读、会写“几分之一”的分数，知道分数个部分的名称。

2、在活动中，发展学生的形象思维，和初步的抽象思维能力。

4、培养学生对分数的探究兴趣，使学生在活动中获得探究、交流的成功体验。

教学过程：

一、通过谈话，明确学习起点

首先，直接告知学生本课要学习“分数”的有关知识。接着，通过谈话了解学生对分数的了解程度。然后抓住其中一些有关分数学习的

有效信息，引入新课。

二、实践活动，建构新知

（一）实践、建模

1、在教师的引导下，讨论一个分数（如：1/2.1/4等）的产生，明确“平均分”的含义和分数表示的具体含义。

2、动手平均分物体，把你心中的分数做出来，画出来。（折纸活动）

3、展示创作成果

做好了的且愿意把成果展示给大家看的，把作品贴在黑板上。

4、讨论、建模

师：看，这些图形漂亮吧！其中蕴藏着许多分数的知识呢？

先判断这些图形的阴影部分都能用分数表示吗？在辨析中进一步强调“平均分”。

再以这些学生自行“创作”的图形为材料，组织讨论交流，在交流中明确其中的两层含义——

第一层：形状、大小都不相同的图形，只要平均分的份数和表示其中的'一份相同，就能用同一个分数表示。

第二层：形状、大小相同的两个图形，同样都表示其中的一份，只要平均分的份数不同，表示的分数就会不同。

5、小结：像这些数就叫分数。

6、了解分数各部分的名称。

7、规范读、写分数的方法。

（二）比较大小，深化认识

1、第一层：以学生“作品”为材料，比较“数形结合”的两个分数的大小。

2、第二层：直接给出两个分数，比较大小。

由此，让学生得到体验：分子是1的分数，分母越大，表示平均分的份数越多，其中的一份就越小；反之，则越大。

一、练一练

1、下列图形中涂色部分的表示方法对吗？

2、用合适的分数表示下面图中的涂色部分。

3、在○里填上“>”或“

二、课堂总结

通过刚才的活动，你有什么收获？

三、课堂延伸

请你在自己创作的图形中，再涂上几份。想一想，这时候该用什么分数表示？

站小学课件篇6

教材分析：

《看谁涂得更好看》一课安排在人美版小学美术第一册第二课。“游戏是儿童的天性”，美术活动与游戏有着内在的联系，想象和自由创造是美术活动与游戏的共同特性。尝试以缤纷的色彩组成灵动的画面，也是儿童喜爱的游戏方式之一。画笔和色彩对儿童有着强烈的吸引力，自幼儿时期，他们就喜欢在随意的涂抹之中体味色彩对视觉的冲击；体味创造的成就感；体味快乐：这种体味是审美的摇篮。在本课学习中使学生积极主动地认识色彩，注意统一纠正某些颜色的不规范名称。在认识色彩的基础上让学生自由选择画笔，自由组织、涂色，以点、面、线、圈、刮等不同方法涂色，感受不同的画笔、不同的方法所带给画面的不同视觉感受，也使学生体会到色彩的搭配与组织的变化带来的不同效果，并且学习敢于大胆组织画面，为今后的学习与创作打下良好的基础。

1、情感目标：通过欣赏艺术大师的绘画作品，引导学生体会不同笔触、不同画材赋予画面的不同效果，了解艺术的丰富性和多样性。

2、创新探究目标：尝试运用不同方法、不同材料画画，，懂得敢于尝试，大胆展现自己的个性。

3、技能目标：能认识不同的色彩，了解油画棒与水彩笔画出来的效果有何不同。

教学重难点：

重点：在美术游戏中学会使用画纸，尝试用不同笔触、不同画材组织画面。

难点：体会不同笔触，不同的画材赋予画面的不同效果。

课前准备：

教师：素描作品、油画作品、水彩作品、水粉作品、版画作品、国画作品、炳稀画的衣服、以及相关的绘画材料，课件等常规用具。

教师快乐谈话：小朋友们，瞧，我把大家喜爱的机器猫请到我们的教室了，他给我们带来了礼物，谁要啊？不过要想得到礼物的小朋友先得过我这一关，就是来做个辨识色彩游戏。

在学生体验好各种材料的不同感受之后，采用谈话法揭题。并且拿山事先准备好的课题，展示在黑板上。

3、了解绘画种类，

引导学生体会不同笔触、不同的画材赋予画面的不同效果。

（素描作品、油画作品、水彩作品、水粉作品、版画作品、国画作品、炳稀画作品等）

布置下节课带工具材料。

札记：新入学的学生好动，还不适应小学生活，40分钟课堂对于他们来说有些漫长，在教学过程中设计一个轻松的环节至关重要。

1、课件欣赏大师作品（师生共同欣赏一组以线条与色块构成的抽象风格的绘画作品如：克利、米罗、康定斯基、蒙德里安等大师作品。）

“你都看到了什么样的线条或色彩？”

“你觉得画画的人心里在想什么？是很高兴？很恐怖？还是有点伤心？哪些笔触让你有这种感觉的？”

播放一段优美的音乐，教师现场示范画一幅画。

根据学生不同喜好分层布置作业，让每位学生都能体会到绘画的乐趣。

（1）临摹画一幅作品。

（2）自己想象创作一幅作品。

（3）自由组合共同完成一幅作品。

是否积极地参与探索活动；

能否大胆地发表自己的感受……。

让每位学生都能体是否灵活地开动脑筋，结合线、色等造型因素进行组织创造：

鼓励学生回家后与父母家人共同装裱自己的作品，装饰自己可爱的家。

札记：

个别学生可能会忘记带绘画工具，教师要多准备儿童绘画用具。来保护孩子学习美术的热情，同时要提醒学生养成良好的学习习惯

站小学课件篇7

教学内容：

教科书第30――32页。

教学目标：

1、让学生在实际操作中认识等腰三角形和等边三角形，知道等腰三角形边和角的名称，知道等腰三角形两个底角相等，等边三角形3个内角相等。

2、让学生在探索图形特征以及相关结论的活动中，进一步发展空间观念，锻炼思维能力。

3、让学生在学习活动中，进一步产生对数学的好奇心，增强动手能力和创新意识。

教学重点：

认识等腰三角形和等边三角形以及它们的特征。

教学难点：

发现等腰三角形和等边三角形角的特征。

教学准备：

例题中的三角形;一张长方形纸，一张正方形纸，剪刀。

教学过程：

一、复习：关于三角形，你有那些知识

1、按角分成三种三角形

2、三个内角和是180度

算第三个角的度数，如果是一般三角形，那就用180去减;如果是直角三角形，那就是90去减……

二、认识等腰三角形：

1、比较老师手边的两块三角板，他们有什么相同(都是直角三角形)

有什么不同(其中有一块三角板的两条边相等，两个角相等;而另一块三角板的角和边都不相同。)

指出：像这种两条边相等的三角形，我们叫它“等腰三角形”

2、折一折、剪一剪：

取一张长方形纸，对折;画出它的对角线，沿对角线剪开;展开

观察：这样剪出来的三角形就是我们今天要认识的等腰三角形。想一想：为什么要对折后再剪呢(这样剪出来的两条边肯定是相等的。)

除了两条边是相等的，还有什么也是相等的你是怎么知道的

(还有两个角也是相等的，因为也是重合的。)

3、画一画：

讨论一下，如果我要把这个等腰三角形画下来，应该怎么画

从一个顶点出发，分别画两条同样长的边，这样就确保有两条边是相等的，然后再连接这两条边，就得到了一个等腰三角形。

师生共画等腰三角形。板书：等腰三角形

4、教学各部分名称：

读“等腰三角形”，想一想，这名字是什么意思(两条腰相等的三角形)

在图上标出：这两条相等的边，我们就叫它“腰”;这第三条边和它们是不相等的，我们叫它“底”

在底边上的这两个角是相等的，就可以共用一个名字“底角”;剩下的这个角，称之为“顶角”。

三、认识等边三角形：

1、刚才有的同学画的等腰三角形，看上去三条边都是相等的。如果真是那样，那它还有一个名字，叫“等边三角形”。

2、为了确保三条边都相等，我们可以这样折：取一正方形形纸，边折边示范，并讲清楚为什么要这样折

剪下后，量一量每条边是不是真都一样长在量的过程中，你还有什么发现(3个角也都相等，都是60度)

3、画等边三角形：很容易保证两条边相等，但保证三条边都相等有一定的困难，所以等边三角形不好画。你有什么办法

方法一：根据角度来画。比如先画一条长3厘米的线段，然后分别画出60度的角，如果两边正好会合，正好都是3厘米，那就说明画得很准确。

方法二：根据高来画。比如先画一条3厘米的线段，然后在1.5厘米处画高，从端点出发到高量出3厘米，并画下来，再画另一条，就得到了等边三角形。

学生动手画一画。

四、完成想想做做：

1、下面物体的面，哪个是等边三角形，哪个是等腰三角形

指名说一说，并说明理由。

2、用一张正方形纸，沿对角线剪开。剪出的两个三角形是等腰三角形吗是直角三角形吗.

分别请学生说说判断的理由。指出：三角形可以按角来分也可以按边来分，这是两种不同的依据可得到不同的结果。

3、画出下面每个图形的另一半，使它成为一个轴对称图形，并说说这几个轴对称图形都是什么三角形。

指出：既然是对称的，那肯定有两条边是相等的，那就是等腰三角形。

4、在点子图上画出有一个角是直角的等腰三角形，再画出每个角都是锐角的等腰三角形。

老师注意巡视检查，也可请几个学生说说自己怎么画的，怎么想的

5、教学你知道吗

五、课堂作业：

第32页第5、6、7题。在写之前可先组织学生说说各题是怎么思考的。

板书设计：

等腰三角形和等边三角形

两条边相等的三角形是等腰三角形

三条边都相等的三角形是等边三角形

礼仪课课件集合14篇

礼仪课课件【篇1】

1、报出公司名称

接听电话时应主动向对方问好，并及时报出公司或部门的名称。

2、确定来电者身份

问清来电者身份可以避免转接过程中遇到问询难以回答，从而浪费宝贵时间。

3、听清来电目的

了解来电目的，有利于对该电话采取合适的处理方式。

4、记录并复述内容

接听完毕时应复述记录的内容，防止记错带来的麻烦，提高工作效率。(记录时应记录：时间、地点、通话目的、联系电话等)

5、铃响不过三声原则

响铃三声内应接电话，时间过长会使客户认为这个公司的员工精神状态不佳。

6、端正坐姿，注意音调

亲切、优美的声音总是能让人舒适，并且正确的坐姿可以使声音洪亮、有精神。

7、左手持筒，右手持笔

提倡左手拿话筒，右手操控电脑或持笔，这样可以轻松自如的与客户沟通。

8、礼貌道别

挂断电话时“喀咯”的声音会使人不舒服，所有应让客户先挂电话并且礼貌道别。

1、记录内容

若对方要找的人不在，你可以里礼貌的问对方是否有事情需要转达，如果有则一定要记清内容，并在对方说完后确定一遍。

2、礼貌转接

如果电话不是找自己而是同事，也应礼貌的进行转接。(例如：“您稍等，我帮您叫他”)

3、谨慎言语

对方若询问同事去哪了或要同事的手机号码，不可轻易告诉他，因为这涉及同事隐私。

打电话的礼仪

打电话时除了与接电话应注意的坐姿声调等要求之外，还应注意：

1、自报家门

拨通电话后应首先自报家门。

2、适当时间。

一般公务电话最好避开临近下班的时间，因为这时对方往往急于下班。

3、表达清晰

交谈时要注意用语礼貌，同时说话要简洁，表达要清晰，不拖泥带水。

4、事前准备

打电话之前应做好准备工作，明确打电话的目的。

5、控制时间

打电话时间应控制在三分钟之内，需详谈的内容可以进行约见面谈。

商务电话礼仪的禁忌

在商务交往中，不允许接电话时以“喂，喂”或者“你找谁呀”作为“见面礼”。特别是不允许一张嘴就毫不客气地查一查对方的“户口”，一个劲儿地问人家“你找谁”，“你是谁”，或者“有什么事儿呀?”

万一对方拨错了电话或电话串了线，也要保持风度。切勿发脾气“耍态度”。确认对方拨错了电话，应先自报一下“家门”，然后再告之电话拨错了。对方如果道了歉，不要忘了以“没关系”去应对，而不要教训人家“下次长好眼睛”、“瞧仔细些”。

如果有可能，不防问一问对方，是否需要帮助他查一下正确的电话号码。真的这样做了，不是“吃饱了撑的”，而是借机宣传了本单位的以礼待人的良好形象。

在通话途中，不要对着话筒打哈欠，或是吃东西。也不要同时与其他人闲聊。不要让对方由此来感到在受话人的心中无足轻重。

结束通话时，应认真地道别。而且要恭候对方先放下电话，不宜“越位”抢先。

在接电话时，再次要注意给予对方以同等的待遇。坚持不分对象地一视同仁。

极其个别的人，长着一对挑肥拣瘦的'“势利眼”。即使是接电话地，也极为庸俗地“因人而宜”、“对象化”的倾向十分明显。他们在接电话时，一开始总是“拿架子”，“打官腔”。先是爱搭不理地问上几句“谁呀”、“什么事呀”，然后能推的事情就推，能踢的皮球就踢，“事不关己，高高挂起”。不过他们的“天气”也不总是永远这般“阴沉”，一旦听出来对方是上司、是家人、是朋友，或是自己正在求助的人，立即就会“雨过天晴云散尽”，低声下气，细语柔声，卑躬屈膝，有求必应，不怕旁人说自己是一副奴才腔。这种不能平等待人的做法，既容易得罪人，也会让旁人看不起。

在接待外来的电话时，理当一律给予同等的待遇，不卑不亢。这种公平的态度，容易为自己赢得朋友。

在通话时，接电话在的一方不宜率先提出中止通话的要求。万一自己正在开会、会客，不宜长谈，或另有其他电话挂出来，需要中止通话时，应说明原因，并告之对方：“一有空闲，我马上挂电话给您。”免得让对方觉得我方厚此薄彼。

遇上不识相的人打起电话没个完，非得让其“适可而止”不可的话，说得应当委婉、含蓄，不要让对方难堪。比如，不宜说：“你说完了没有?我还有别的事情呢，”而应当讲：“好吧，我不再占用您的宝贵时间了”，“真不希望就此道别，不过以后真的希望再有机会与您联络”。

礼仪课课件【篇2】

礼仪培训课件

一、课程介绍

1.1 课程名称：礼仪培训课件

1.2 课程概述：本课程是一套关于现代社交礼仪的培训课件，旨在帮助学员掌握基本的礼仪常识和技巧，提高个人社交能力和综合素质。

1.3 适用人群：本课程适用于所有希望提升社交礼仪水平的人群，包括但不限于企业职员、商务人士、学校教师和学生等。

二、课程内容

2.1 礼仪的概念和意义

a.礼仪的概念：礼仪是指人们在社交场合中所应遵循的一系列规范和行为习惯。

b.礼仪的意义：礼仪是人类文明的体现，它体现了人与人之间的和谐，有助于拓展社交关系，提高人际交往能力和社会地位。

2.2 礼仪的分类和规范

a. 礼仪的分类：礼仪可以分为官方礼仪、宗教礼仪、商务礼仪、社交礼仪、家庭礼仪等。

b. 礼仪的规范：在各种不同的礼仪中，存在着各种各样的规范和标准，如着装、言行、姿态等，这些规范是在社交场合中必须遵守的。

2.3 礼仪的技巧和实践

a. 礼仪的技巧：礼仪中涉及到言行、容貌、姿态等方面的技巧，这些技巧可以通过实践和学习来掌握。

b. 礼仪的实践：礼仪不仅是一种文化，更是一种习惯和修养。只有在实践中不断学习和修正，才能真正掌握社交礼仪。

三、课程收获

3.1 理解礼仪的概念、分类和规范，全面提高社交场合中的礼仪水平。

3.2 掌握和运用礼仪技巧，增强个人的信心和魅力。

3.3 加强社交关系，提高个人社交能力和综合素质。

四、总结

本课程旨在通过系统、全面的培训，为人们提供一套科学、实用的现代社交礼仪体系，从而提高个人的社交能力和综合素质。掌握良好的社交礼仪，将有助于人们在各种社交场合中更加从容自信、得体得意。

礼仪课课件【篇3】

1.初步了解什么是，使学生知道我们的日常生活离不开礼仪。

2.了解仪容礼仪，并能按照学到的仪容礼仪来要求自己。

3.心中树立礼仪小使者形像，能够随时提醒自己要律己敬人。教学过程：

一、礼仪小使者

师：我国号称礼仪之邦，文明古国，从周朝时期便制定有做人的规范。《尚书》中详细记载了许多人人应当遵循的行为规范和典章制度。孔子认为礼是治国安邦的基础，“不学礼，无以立”(《史记》)。中华民族五千年文明史，也是文明礼貌发展史。直到今天，我国人民热情好客，文明礼貌，尊老爱幼等优势传统仍为世界各国所称道。仪容仪表是礼仪中最重要的部分。

师：同学们，你们知道什么是仪容仪表吗?

生：疑惑

师：仪容主要是指人的容貌，仪表即指人的外表，它包括容貌、姿态、服饰、风度、个人卫生等。一个人的仪表不但可以体现其文化修养，也可以反映其审美情趣。穿着得体，不仅赢得他人的信赖，给人留下良好的印象，而且还能够提高与人交往的能力。相反，穿着不当，举止不雅，往往会降低自己的身份，损害自己的形象。中、小学生的仪容仪表在追求美的同时应符合学生的身份和特点，达到仪表美与心灵美的高度统一。

师：今天我们就来说一说小学生的仪容仪表。

师：对于一名小学生来说，仪容仪表的主要内容是什么?

生:穿校服、佩戴红领巾••••••

师：仪容仪表主要有两方面：

(1)养成良好的卫生习惯。

(2)保持个人清洁。

师：我们应该从那些方面养成良好的卫生习惯呢?

生：整洁干净，脸、脖颈、手都应洗得干干净净

生：头发按时理、经常洗，指甲经常剪;

生：注意口腔卫生，早晚刷牙，饭后漱口，不能当着客人面嚼口香糖; 生：经常洗澡、换衣服，消除身体异味，有狐臭要搽药品或及早治疗。师：说到洗手，那你们知道怎样洗手，才叫真正的洗手呢?

学生茫然。

老师讲解洗手方法：养成良好的洗手习惯，可以预防流感。而大多数人没有养成洗手的良好习惯，也不知道如何正确科学地洗手。怎样才算是正确科学的洗手方法?一起来了解一下。

一般人在洗手时，多半只是简单快速的搓洗一下手心、手背，就以为已经完成任务。要有效预防甲流等传染性疾病，医生建议，洗手需要按照七步法：第一步，双手手心相互搓洗;第二步，手心对手背交叉相叠搓洗;第三步，手心对手心搓洗手指缝; 第四步，指尖搓洗手心; 第五步，一只手握住另一只手的拇指搓洗; 第六步，指尖摩擦掌心搓洗; 第七步，一只手握住另一只手的手腕转动搓洗。

二、礼仪活动

师：同学们，你在上学之前照过镜子吗?我们要养成要让全身收拾整

齐才可以出门的好习惯。那么在穿衣镜前要检查哪些具体内容呢? 师：我们边说边跟老师一起做。

(1) 穿着校服时，要将衣服整理好，拉平，要将长款的上衣(衬衫)束进裤腰里，不要露在裤腰的外面。

(2) 要端正地配戴好红领巾(绿领巾)。

(3) 要将头发梳理整齐，很多女孩子是长发，需要扎辫子。男孩子头发短、但也要养成梳理、整理头发的习惯。

(4) 穿着的袜子，要将它们拉到基本相平的水平线上，不要一高一低。

(5) 要系好鞋带。

礼仪课课件【篇4】

护士礼仪课件

导言

随着医疗事业的不断发展和丰富，护士作为医疗事业中不可或缺的重要角色，其职业形象和行为举止备受关注。如何让护士更好地表现其职业化形象和职业道德，成为了现代护理教育中的重要课题。作为一项必备的职业素养，护士礼仪教育成为了当今医疗事业中不可缺少的一部分。

一、护士礼仪的重要性

护士作为医疗团队中至关重要的组成部分，其对患者的重要性不言而喻。护士的职业形象直接关系到医疗事业的形象和信誉，因此，护士礼仪教育就显得尤为重要。

首先，护士是患者的朋友和亲戚，她们与患者接触时间最长、最密切，直接影响到患者的体验度。在患者看来，医护人员的外表、言谈举止、态度都会影响到他们的情绪和信任感。因此，一个有礼仪意识的护士能够更好地感染和关爱患者，建立医患关系，提升医护形象。

其次，护士在护理过程中要与医生、其他护士、家属等团队成员协作，这就需要护士具备良好的职业素养和文化传播能力。一个有着良好礼仪的护士能更好地与其他医护人员进行沟通和交流，更好地完成护理工作。

最后，护士作为医院代表之一，其职业形象与医院的形象紧密相连。一个有着高度礼仪意识的护士能够减少医院对患者的不良印象，提高医院的声誉和知名度。

二、护士礼仪课件的主题和内容

为了更好地提高护士的礼仪素养，现将护士礼仪课件的主题和内容进行简要介绍。

1.形象整体

护士是医疗团队中最引人注目的角色之一，护士的职业形象可以很好地彰显医疗团队的形象和态度。因此，在课件中需要重点介绍护士的整体形象规范，包括服装、化妆、发型等方面。

2.文化传播

护士在与患者、家属接触中，需要保持良好的交流和沟通，因此，需要具备良好的语言表达和想象力。在课件中应注重护士的文化传播能力，引导护士在交流中更好地传递自己的思想和表达。

3.工作能力

护士是医疗工作的执行者，因此，在课件中应重点介绍护士的工作能力和常见问题的处理方案。例如，如何在显露不安慰的情况下进行擦洗、如何进行协作、如何处理不合理的要求等等。

4.职业道德

作为护士，具备良好的职业道德非常重要。护士在工作中要遵守职业准则，保持真诚、恳切、和蔼。在课件中可以适当地介绍护士的职业道德标准、职业观念等准则，引导护士建立正确的职业道德体系。

三、如何有效行动护士礼仪课件

为了更好地提高护士的礼仪素养，以下几点可以帮助护士有效行动护士礼仪课件：

1.不断学习。护士应该认识到礼仪教育是一项长期的工作，需要沉淀和耐心。要不断地学习和钻研，完善自己的能力和文化。

2.切实落实。让教育融入实践生活中，不断在工作中进行改进和完善，达到真正的教育和实践相结合。

3.创新思考。礼仪教育的呈现方式和手段需要不断创新，考虑护士的日常工作特点和实际需求，制作更贴近实际、推广更实用的教育手册。

结语

作为现代护理教育中不可缺少的一环，护士礼仪教育必须得到高度重视。在医疗事业中，护士的职业形象、职业道德和工作能力，都需要以更好的礼仪素养为基石。相信在各方努力下，护士礼仪教育一定能够更加深入人心，为医疗事业注入新的更高的活力和动力。

礼仪课课件【篇5】

护士礼仪课件

一、背景介绍

护士是医务工作者中最亲近病人的群体，他们需要具备良好的沟通能力和专业知识，以便在临床工作中为病人提供最优质的护理服务。然而，在实际工作中，一些护士的行为不够规范，甚至存在不当的言行举止，给病人和家属带来了不必要的烦恼和困扰。因此，加强护士的礼仪培训和教育，提高其职业素养和形象，是非常必要的。

二、问题分析

1. 礼仪意识淡薄，个人素质不够高：一些护士在日常工作中没有意识到自己的形象和言行举止会直接影响病人的治疗效果和信任感，缺乏对职业形象的认识和重视。

2. 沟通技巧不够娴熟：护士需要与病人及家属进行良好的沟通，但是有些护士表达能力不够强，不会处理好与病人的关系，有时说话过分生硬或不恰当，会引起不良后果。

3. 服务态度不够优质：有些护士在工作中缺乏热情和耐心，如对病人不够温暖，对家属态度不够友好，无助于建立良好的医患关系。

三、解决方案

1. 建立礼仪意识：通过讲解护士的职业操守以及礼仪的基本原则，引导护士从根本上培养良好的职业规范和行为习惯，提高个人素质和职业形象。

2. 培养沟通技巧：提高护士的沟通能力，尤其是与病人和家属交流的技巧，包括倾听、表达、理解和引导等方面，以便更好地了解病情和诉求，并帮助病人放心、安心。

3. 提高服务质量：加强护理的文化和灵性建设，树立服务意识，提高工作质量和效率，为患者提供更优质的护理服务。体现在医疗护理中的就是要贴心温暖地关怀每一个病患，形成良好的医患互动关系。

四、总结

护士作为医疗队伍中不可或缺的一员，其形象和素质直接关系到医疗服务的质量和效果。培养良好的礼仪意识、沟通技巧和服务态度是提高护士的职业素养和形象的关键，为病人提供温暖的护理服务，建立良好的医患关系，是护士工作的基本要求。因此，加强护士礼仪教育和培训是医疗服务质量提高的必然选择，对于建设和谐医患关系具有积极的推动作用。

礼仪课课件【篇6】

护士礼仪课件

随着医疗行业的日益发展，护士的职业地位和责任越来越重要。而护士礼仪则是护理工作中不可或缺的一部分，其重要性不言而喻。本文将围绕护士礼仪为主题，从意义、知识要点、实践案例等方面进行探讨。

一、护士礼仪的意义

礼仪是人类社会交往的一种风俗习惯，具有统一社会行为规范、美化人际关系、表达情感感受、增进人际信任等作用。而在护理工作中，礼仪更是体现了护士的职业素养和责任担当，为护患关系的良性互动和治疗效果的提高打下了基础。

首先，护士礼仪可以增强护患沟通的效果。在信息社会的今天，护理工作中沟通交流占据了重要的地位。良好的护士礼仪不仅可以带来高效的信息传递和及时的反馈，还能有效降低患者的紧张和抵触心态，让患者更好地理解和接受治疗。

其次，护士礼仪可以提升医疗服务的品质。优质的医疗服务需要不仅技术和设备支持，还需要注重患者的身体和心理健康。良好的护士礼仪有助于创造温馨、舒适和安全的医疗环境，不仅能够增强患者的治疗信心，还能够促进患者的身心健康。

最后，护士礼仪可以树立护士职业形象和地位。护理工作作为医疗行业的重要组成部分，其职业形象和服务品质在医院和社会中也越来越受重视。优秀的护士礼仪可以提高护士的职业形象和社会地位，让护士成为医疗行业中不可或缺的一部分。

二、护士礼仪的知识要点

护士礼仪是一门综合学科，涉及的知识点非常广泛。以下是护士礼仪的主要知识要点：

1. 护士基本礼仪：包括形象仪容、文明用语、礼貌待人等方面，是护士礼仪的基石。

2. 护士病区礼仪：包括安全卫生、手术准备、患者护理等方面的礼仪规范，是护士工作中必须遵循的一些规则。

3. 护士访视礼仪：包括时间安排、问诊技巧、患者沟通等方面的礼仪规范，是护士工作中沟通交流的重要方式。

4. 护士执业礼仪：包括职业道德、职责范围、权利义务等方面的礼仪规范，是护士职业生涯中必须遵循的基本准则。

以上知识点虽然只是护士礼仪的冰山一角，但却能够帮助护士深入理解护士礼仪的重要性和规范要求。

三、护士礼仪的实践案例

护士礼仪是一门实践性很强的学科，需要护士在实际工作中不断地进行练习和总结。以下是一些护士礼仪的实践案例：

1. 形象仪容的保持：护士需要在日常工作中注重个人形象和仪容，要让自己看起来整洁、清爽且充满活力。可以注意个人的穿着搭配、化妆品使用、发型造型等方面，提高职业形象。

2. 礼貌待人的表现：护士工作中需要面对各种患者和家属，要做到态度温和、语言文明、微笑待人，积极解答问题和疑虑，沟通交流得当，做到毫无挑剔。

3. 护士病区的管理：护士需要注意病区的卫生和安全，要做到病床整洁、消毒准确、不乱丢垃圾、防止传染病等方面，使患者和家属能够放心和安心。

4. 出诊时的技巧：护士出诊时需要按照患者的需求和要求制定工作计划、调整工作节奏和技术路线，处理好每一项工作，使患者能够轻松愉快地度过难关。

以上案例只是护士礼仪实践的一部分，但都能够体现出护士在工作中遵循规范的重要性以及规范执行的好处。

四、护士礼仪的未来展望

随着社会的不断开放和进步，护士工作也将面临更加复杂和严峻的挑战，护士礼仪更是需要不断优化和升级。未来，护士礼仪应该体现以下特点：

1. 科技化：护士礼仪需要借助新技术和新手段提高服务品质和管理水平，例如人工智能、远程医疗等。

2. 本土化：护士礼仪需要结合本地实际条件和文化背景，先行制定本地化的礼仪规范。

3. 专业化：护士礼仪需要在与时俱进的基础上提高护士专业素养和工作技能，做到全面发展。

4. 标准化：护士礼仪需要有明确的标准化规范，使护士行业具有更高的规范性和可持续性。

总之，护士礼仪是非常重要的一门学科，需要护士们在实践中不断地去探索和实践。只有做到以规范为基础、以服务为核心的理念，才能够做好护理工作、提高医疗品质，服务患者的身心健康。

礼仪课课件【篇7】

【活动目标】

1.初步懂得进餐礼仪，知道要文明进餐。

2.能用较连贯的语言表达自己的想法。

3.养成敢想敢做、勤学、乐学的良好素质。

4.教育幼儿养成做事认真，不马虎的好习惯。

【活动准备】

口杯若干，水果拼盘，盘子若千等。

【活动建议】

1、创设进餐情境：教室正前方摆放 2 张桌子，桌子上放着若干已倒好的饮料，和人数一样多的小盘子、水果拼盘、牙签。请几个幼儿分别到桌前坐好，让他们进餐，并请幼儿观察他们进餐的情境。

请幼儿分组讨论：他们进餐时是怎样的，谁做得对做得好?

2、教师请幼儿回忆以前在教室进餐时，小朋友进餐情况怎样?而现在到餐厅，你们的进餐情况又是怎样的?你们要怎样做呢?

幼儿举手回答，以前在教室进餐空间小，老师听到哪个小朋友讲话，就请他 (她)不要讲话，我们就静下来，从来没有大声讲话或吵闹的现象。而现在餐厅里人很多，也很吵。你们以后要怎么做呢?

幼儿总结：

我们以后，吃饭不掉饭粒，进餐时不能大声讲话，因为吃饭讲话不卫生，小朋友吃饭要安静，慊得尊重别人，对别人要有礼貌，吃好饭后，安静等小朋友，不能下座位乱走动等。

教师小结：

小朋友说得都对，我们要养成良好的进餐习惯，懂得文明进餐，老师想只要小朋友们都能管好自己的小嘴巴，安安静静地吃饭，别班的小朋友也能跟着安静下来，对吧!以后就要看小朋友们的表现了。

游戏：文明进餐，把幼儿分组，模拟进餐情境，其他幼儿当观众，看进餐的幼儿能否做到文明进餐。教师和幼儿一起对游戏进行评价。

结束：幼儿小鸟般飞出教室。

本次活动的主要目标是懂得进餐礼仪，知道要文明进餐;能用较连贯的语言表达自己的想法。教师在活动中要通过观看孩子们创设的进餐情境表

活动反思：

通过活动，幼儿知道了进餐过程中的一些基本礼仪，如进餐时不讲话，不能一心二用，不能挑食，吃完自己的一份食物后再离开餐桌。正确使用餐具，爱护卫生，进餐时保持自己、桌面、地面的清洁，进餐后会收拾自己的餐具并及时进行漱口和擦嘴。本次教学活动中，我虽然抓住了幼儿的心理特征，但是在材料的准备上，还不够充分，不能够给幼儿更多的提示。

一个成功的活动，离不开教师对每个环节精心的设计与考虑。总之，我们教师平时要多善于观察、多思考、多去了解幼儿，时刻做一个有心人。

礼仪课课件【篇8】

礼仪培训课件

一、导言

在现代社会中，礼仪越来越成为一个必须具备的素质。尤其在商业活动等场合，礼仪的重要性更是不可忽视。为了提高人员的礼仪素养，提升企业形象和效益，本公司特别举办了一个礼仪培训课程。

二、让形象更专业

礼仪是一个人的外在形象，是一个企业的形象展现。在商业活动中，人们首先看到的是对方的外表，因此，个人的仪态举止、穿着打扮等都要符合职业规范，才能营造出良好的企业形象。

1. 职业形象：作为商业活动中的参与者，我们需要树立自己的职业形象，主要体现在仪态举止和穿着打扮等方面。仪态举止要端庄稳重，需要时需要站立或坐立要文雅，微笑、眼神交流和礼貌问候等都要做到恰到好处。穿着时需要根据场合进行选择，要注意修饰和搭配，整体上要让人有一种清新、舒适的感觉，让自己和企业成为人们心中的“高端人士”。

2. 表达能力：在现代商业活动中，交际能力是必备的。礼仪培训中，我们会重点讲解如何在交际中表现形象，如何在表达上避免口吃或慌乱，如何处理应对人的态度等。这些都是成为一个优秀商人必备的技能。

3. 文化知识：在商业活动中，需要大量的文化知识，当然也需要那些和我们本人不太相关的知识。在礼仪培训中，我们会介绍一些基本的文化知识，如诗词歌赋、书法、绘画等。这些知识能够更好地让我们应对各种商业活动，从而有利于提升企业的效益。

三、为提高企业效益而服务

礼仪培训的重点是如何为提高企业效益而服务。对于企业来说，需要一批专业化的员工来代表自己的企业，只有他们具备了更高层次的礼仪素养，才能赢得更多订单，交到更多朋友，做到个人和企业的双赢。

1. 战略选优：在具备专业素养的前提下，如何更好地去战略选优，将自己的企业介绍到更多人的面前。此时，我们需要着重讲解商业交流，例如如何在商场上通过简洁明快的说话、坚定自信的态度展示，如何通过言语、肢体语言等营造出自身“高大上”的形象等等。

2. 技能提升：在这个竞争激烈的商业时代，单纯依靠礼仪素养是不够的，我们需要更高层次的技能来提升企业的效益。礼仪培训中，我们会增加一些相关的知识和技能，如市场营销、人力资源等。这些技能的提升将有力于提升企业的竞争实力，从而帮助我们在商业世界中获得更多的成功。

四、最终实现社会责任

礼仪培训的最终目的不仅是为了提高个人的素质，还要为实现社会责任而服务。我们在礼仪培训中，会重点介绍一些道德伦理原则，如尊重、公正、诚信等。我们会帮助人们树立一个正确的价值观，让每一个人都时刻保持一颗良好的心态，用自己的行动实现企业发展与社会发展的双赢。

结语

礼仪是一个人的外在形象，是一个企业的形象展现。在现代商业活动中，群众对礼仪拥有更高的要求。作为企业，我们应该不断提升自己的礼仪素质。通过一系列的礼仪培训课程，让我们的员工更加专业化、更加高端、更加具备自信心，从而实现企业和社会的双赢。

礼仪课课件【篇9】

教学目标：

1、能正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文，会分角色朗读课文。

2、能抓住文中的重点词语去品味人物语言进而把握人物性格特点。

3、理解公仪休最后一段话的含义，学习公仪休清正廉洁的高贵品格。

教学重点：

有感情地朗读课文，体会公仪休的崇高品格。

教学难点：

理解公仪休最后一段话的含义。

教学过程：

一、复习导入。

(一)、复习独幕剧的特色。

(二)、这节课我们就来好好读读剧本，研究剧中人物的性格;再根据剧本演好这部戏，演完后评选最佳演员和最佳导演。

二、设疑入境，走进文本。

(一)、师问：公仪休拒收的礼物是什么?(两条活鲤鱼)

(二)、师：古时候的鲁国，水产品奇缺，这两条活鲤鱼可是很难得的礼物呀!可公仪休为什么不收呢?他的学生子明和我们同样感到很不理解，谁能找到子明的疑问并读给大家听一听?

(三)、指名读子明的话，即“老师，您不是很喜欢吃鱼的吗?现在有人送鱼来，您却不接受，这是为什么呢?”师及时评价、鼓励，指导学生读好疑问的语气。

三、自主解疑，品读文本。

(一)、以疑设疑，学习“公仪休爱吃鱼”的环节。

1、你认为公仪休爱吃鱼吗?从哪些地方可以看出来呢?带着这个问题边读边想，找到答案画下来，多读几遍，有想法可以写在旁边。

2、学生自读，完成后先同位再集体交流。

(1)指名读体现公仪休爱吃鱼的句子，即“嗯，刚吃过……心满意足了

(2)师引导：读书要品味出文章内涵，读出感情来，应做到――口到、眼到、心到。即读到哪个句子，眼睛就要盯住重点词语，心里就要去体会人物说话时的表情、动作、神态等。

(3)指导感情朗读，抓住“回味似的”、“实在是鲜美呀!”、“心满意足了!”等词语并辅以表情、动作等，读好人物对话。

(二)、自主解疑，学习“公仪休拒收鱼”的环节。

下面，就请同学们利用我们刚才掌握的学习方法：“读――想--画，”和“读书三到”来自主学习，解决子明的疑问。

1、学生自主学习“管家送鱼”和“公仪休拒收鱼并解释原因”部分的内容。

2、学生解读疑问、品味课文，教师巡视指导，帮助后进生。

3、交流、反馈。

(1)指名读“管家送鱼”的相关句子。

a你认为管家是个怎样的人?从哪些词语可以看出?生答后，师板书：奉承讨好、别有用心。

b结合生活中的情景，进一步练读管家的话，抓住“满脸堆笑”等词体会人物性格特点。

c讨论：你喜欢管家这样的人吗?指名口述，让生说出原因。

(2)师引导：尽管管家阿谀奉承，说尽好话，但仍被公仪休巧妙回绝了，从这我们可以看出公仪休是个____的人。生答后，师板书：聪明机智。

(3)喜欢吃鱼，却要装作闻到鱼腥就要呕吐，这其中可是大有文章呀!下面谁来当一当公仪休，给子明做进一步的解释呢?

a指名读该部分内容。(即“正因为……有鱼吃吗?”)

b你能不看课文，把公仪休不收鱼的原因解释给同位听吗?说时，引导学生弄懂其中的关系：

如果收鱼――违犯法纪

如果犯法――吃不上鱼

现在自己买――一直有鱼吃

c同位说后，指名练说。

(4)公仪休的这番话，更说明他还具有怎样的品质?生答后，师板书：清正廉洁。

(5)齐读这部分内容，强调读好反问句。

四、积累内化，巩固文本。

1、让生说说子明是个怎样的人，从哪里可以看出?

2、指名回答后，师板书：谦逊有礼、勤学好问。

3、结合板书上出现的三种人物的不同性格特点，让学生练习分角色朗读课文。

4、指名分角色朗读课文。提示：要结合恰当的表情、神态及形体语言，更好地展现人物的性格特点。

5、教师适时评价、鼓励，小结：看到同学们读得这么投入、精彩，相信排演独幕小话剧时一定表现更棒!

六、迁移拓展，走出文本。

出示幻灯片，展示某些官员因为贪脏枉法而身败名裂的故事，从反面例证告诉同学们要遵纪守法，坚持原则。

六、全文小结。

今天你学到了什么?

板书设计：

10 公仪休拒收礼物

公仪休：聪明机智清正廉洁

子明：谦逊有礼勤学好问

管家：奉承讨好别有用心

礼仪课课件【篇10】

教师礼仪——教师职业的持续优化

近年来，教师礼仪已成为教育行业内不容忽视的重要问题。对于一名教师来说，如何展现自己的职业形象，如何正确处置教学纠纷，如何正确对待学生等都需要一定的礼仪修养。教师礼仪需要在教育培训中得到持续优化，以进一步提高教师的教学效果和教师形象的品质。

近年来，随着教育的快速发展，教师的职业形象和专业素养成为了教育行业内不容忽视的话题。教师是学生的引路人，更是社会的民族教师。因此，教师在职业上所需要的礼仪修养已经成为教育行业的重要议题。而教育培训院校或专业个体的努力，也在不断推广教师礼仪教育，加强教师的礼仪修养。

首先，教师礼仪旨在展现教师的正式、严谨和文化素养。对于教师来说，如何在工作中正确处置与学生或家长的纠纷，如何进一步维护教学秩序和强化授课内容都需要一定的礼仪修养。而一名教师具有良好的礼仪修养，不仅可以让学生向他敬畏，同时也能进一步提高学生的学习兴趣，从而达到远离弊病且激发学生学习的好处。

其次，教师礼仪还包括对于孩子的语气和态度的规范。很多教师工作中具有优秀的专业素养，但由于言行失范、态度不端或只顾自己而怠于掌控，使得教师在学生中引起的不良影响甚至影响到了学生的学习情绪。这不仅是对教育行业的内在挑战，也表明了教育行业内需要持续推进教师职业礼仪的挑战。只有通过对教师语言和态度的规范，才能进一步增强教师的综合素质及职业良心。

再次，教师礼仪主要是关注教师和学生之间的沟通。无论是教师和家长的沟通，还是教育业内教师与学生的沟通，都需要一定的交流技巧和良好的沟通环境。教师和学生之间进行有效的沟通，可以使师生之间的情感更加贴近，提高教师形象和专业素养。同时，也为学生的学习成长提供了更有价值的帮助和建议。

最后，教育行业在推行教师礼仪方面需要不断的持续优化。通过发挥地方优势，建立完善的教育培训体系，教育行业可以进一步提高教师对礼仪的重视和约束意识，加强教师的职业修养，提升教师的整体素质和教学水平，从而更好地服务学生和社会。

在未来的教育实践中，教师礼仪将继续成为教育行业内不容忽视的问题。只有通过教育业内人员的自我约束和自我规范，才能达成教育行业内的行业信，成为教育行业内成就伟大事业的保障。

礼仪课课件【篇11】

教师礼仪课件是一种能够帮助教师提高自身礼仪素养的教学工具。通过教师礼仪课件，教师能够了解礼仪的基本内容、应用场景以及实践方法，从而在日常教学工作中更好地展现自己的专业形象和教学能力。下面，我将详细阐述教师礼仪课件的相关内容，以使更多的教师能够受益于此。

首先，教师礼仪课件需要包含哪些内容？一般来说，它应该包括以下几个方面。首先，礼仪基础知识，如仪容仪表、言谈举止、待人接物等。其次，礼仪的应用场景，如教室、学校、家庭等。再次，高效的实践方法，如借助身体语言展示自信、运用礼貌用语表现关心等。最后，教师礼仪课件还需要提供一些与教学实践相关的案例分析，以帮助教师更好地理解、运用礼仪。

然后，教师礼仪课件的编写应该有哪些原则？首先，要注意传统与现代的结合。虽然传统礼仪在当今社会已经被淡化，但作为教师，我们仍要尊重传统，学习其中的优秀传统。同时，我们也需要在实践中吸收现代礼仪的精华，使其更贴近当下的教学工作。其次，要合理分配板块。在设计课件结构时，应该根据内容的逻辑关系来分块，使课件的结构清晰、易于理解。同时，还要注意设置导航栏、书签、链接等功能，方便用户获取信息。最后，要注意课件的文风与色彩。教师礼仪课件的语言应该简洁明了，不能出现专业术语过度、语言晦涩等情况。同时，课件的色彩应该温和自然，不宜过于艳丽或过于冷酷。

最后，教师应该如何有效地运用教师礼仪课件？首先，要根据自己的实际需要进行有针对性地学习。不能一味照搬课件中的内容，而要结合自己的具体工作来学习，将理论与实践相结合。其次，要注意时刻提醒自己，纠正自己在待人接物、仪容仪表等方面的不足。只有通过不断地反思和实践，才能真正提高自身的礼仪素养。最后，要学会分享自己的学习成果。可以通过集体研讨、个人分享等方式，向其他教师传递自己学习礼仪的心得。通过分享和交流，不仅可以使自己获得更多反馈和建议，也可以帮助其他教师提高自身素养。

综上所述，教师礼仪课件是一个十分实用的教学工具，是优秀教师塑造内外形象、提升教学表现的重要手段。教师们应该充分认识到它的价值、学习它的内容，将其运用到教学实践中，给学生提供更优质的教学服务。

礼仪课课件【篇12】

护士礼仪课件

近年来，医疗领域的发展日新月异，随之而来的是对医护人员职业素养的不断追求。其中，护士礼仪是一项非常重要的内容。护士是医疗团队中至关重要的一员，其职业素养的高低不仅关系到患者的治疗效果，更关系到患者的感受和医疗服务的品质。因此，护士应该具备高尚的职业道德和良好的职业礼仪，以提高服务质量和医疗效果。

一、护士礼貌和仪容

作为一名护士，良好的仪容和礼貌是最基本的职业要求。在工作岗位上，护士首先需要保持整洁自己的仪容，衣着干净、整齐、舒适；化妆要文雅，不要浓妆艳抹；发型整齐、干净，不要挡住视线。同时，在与患者交流时，护士应该真诚、热情、微笑，避免说话过于急躁和不耐烦的情况出现。这些细节的处理，不仅能提高患者对护士服务的信任，更能为患者带来更好的服务体验。

二、护士聊天技巧

护士在工作时，通常需要进行与患者的聊天。然而，聊天技巧不好的护士往往会让患者感到不适，甚至会影响护士与患者之间的关系。具体来说，护士应该做到以下几点：

1.聆听：不管患者说什么，护士应该耐心地听完再做出回应。在聊天中，护士应该始终保持专注并尽可能地了解患者的需求。

2.积极：在与患者交流时，护士应该保持积极、乐观的心态。这可以让患者感受到安心和温暖。

3.语言表达：护士在与患者交流时，应该使用清晰、简单的语言来表达自己的意思。同时，避免使用医学专业词汇，更加贴近患者的生活，以便患者更好地理解和接受。

三、患者隐私保护

护士在与患者交流时，需要注意保护患者的隐私。无论是患者的病历、诊断结果还是其个人隐私，护士都需要严格保密。护士必须遵守医院的隐私保护规定，对患者的相关信息进行合理使用和保护。

四、环境卫生处理

护士在追求自身形象的同时，也需要注意环境的卫生。医院是一个管理严格的环境，护士需要做好日常的清洁卫生工作，及时清扫卫生间、更换床单被褥，保证患者的安全、卫生和舒适。

就医中，良好的护理是非常重要的。在日常的医疗服务中，护士礼仪成为了重要的学科，可以帮助护士更好地面对自己的工作。健康的患者和病人需要文明的服务，这是护士礼仪课程的目的所在。护士们不仅需要在工作中，重视礼仪的要求，也需要将护士职业素养提升为自己的文化素养之一。

礼仪课课件【篇13】

教师礼仪课件主题范文：

一、引言

教师作为一种职业，是一种具有责任感和使命感的职业。对于教师来说，不仅需要具备高素质的教育教学能力，同时也需要具备良好的教师职业道德和教师礼仪，这样才能成为受学生尊重和信任的好老师，树立起良好的师生关系。

二、教师职业道德和教师礼仪的概念

教师职业道德是教师在教育教学过程中所应遵循的职业道德规范和行为准则，它是教师职业行为的基石，是教师职业文化的核心。

教师礼仪是指教师在教育教学过程中应具备的一种礼仪意识和礼仪行为，它是教师职业形象和教师职业素养的体现。教师礼仪包含的内容是多方面的，如教师仪容仪表、着装要求、授课语言、课堂行为、处理师生关系等等。

三、教师礼仪的重要性

1. 树立良好的师生关系

教师礼仪是教师职业形象和教师职业素养的体现，它是教师与学生交往中最基本、最直接、最有效的一种表现方式，它是促进师生和谐相处、增进师生感情的重要因素之一。

2. 提升教师的教育教学水平

教师礼仪不仅能为学生树立一个良好的榜样，也能够使得教师的教育教学工作更加顺畅、有效。在课堂教学中，有条不紊、有序、井然有序的教师让学生觉得他是一位严谨、认真、负责的老师，学生才会尊重他，听取他的话。

3. 培养学生良好的行为习惯

教师的一言一行都是学生行为模式的榜样，学生模仿教师的礼仪行为对其行为的发展具有重要影响。如果教师的行为具有正面意义，那么学生将更容易形成良好的行为习惯，反之亦然。

四、教师礼仪的具体要求

1. 教师仪容仪表

教师的仪容仪表是教师职业形象中非常重要的一个方面。教师必须要始终保持整洁、清洁、得体的仪容和仪表，仪表上不能有过多的饰物，服装要干净整洁，不要太过奢华。

2. 课堂语言

教师在授课时应采取客观、中立的语言表达方式，不妄自菲薄，不自夸自奖，更不能采用侮辱、嘲笑、诋毁、挑衅等不当语言进行口头攻击和人身伤害。

3. 课堂行为

教师在授课时应该始终保持精神集中、注意力集中、行为得体、举止优雅，可以恰当地运用一些肢体语言或者动作表情进行辅助说明教学内容，但不能过分夸张。

4. 处理师生关系

教师在处理师生关系的过程中，需要始终保持客观公正、公平合理、尊重人性、彬彬有礼的原则。教师在与学生交流时，要尽量做到让学生站在自己的立场上看问题，尝试理解学生的心情和想法，并给予必要的指导和帮助。

五、结语

教师礼仪是教师应该具备的最基本的素养之一，也是成为成功的教师的关键之一。只有通过不断地自我反思、自我修正、自我提升，才能真正做到教学相长、行为恰当、风范高贵的大师水平。

礼仪课课件【篇14】

护士礼仪是一个护士必须具备的重要素质，它不仅能让患者感受到温暖和关怀，也能够给人留下深刻的印象。因此，必须强调护士的礼仪素养，让他们做到温暖亲切，言行得体，尊重患者，以便提高医疗质量和服务质量，建立良好的医疗形象和声誉。

一、护士的着装礼仪

1.注意头发的整洁和不要遮挡面部

护士应将头发整齐地梳理好，不要让头发遮挡住面部，否则会给人留下不整洁、不专业的印象。

2.注意穿着医院特制服装

护士应穿着医院特制的工作服，这样能体现医院的规范和统一性，也能使患者对护士的执业资格和专业能力更有信心。

3.注意鞋子和袜子的清洁

鞋子和袜子一定要保持干净，不要穿高跟鞋，因为这样不仅容易疲劳，还会影响到护士的行动。

4.注意首饰和化妆品的选择

护士应避免过多的首饰和化妆品，特别是指甲油和口红等有色化妆品，这样不仅容易引起患者的反感，也可能引起患者对工作的干扰。

二、护士的行为礼仪

1.注意言辞和态度

护士在与患者交流时，一定要注意言辞和态度。应该用清晰明了、亲切自然的语言沟通，耐心倾听患者的问题和需求，不要在对待患者的过程中显得傲慢和不耐烦。无论是与患者、同事和家属的交往时，都应该保持良好的敬业精神和优秀的职业素养。

2.注意护理操作的规范

护士在工作中的每一个步骤都应该按照标准操作规程和操作要求执行，不要出现疏漏或是偏差。在接触患者前，要洗手、消毒，戴上口罩，避免交叉感染。

3.注意患者的隐私

护士应该尊重患者的隐私权，不能随意泄露患者的个人信息和病情信息。在进行护理操作时，应尽可能减少患者的羞耻感。

4.注意与患者的心理交流

护士要关注患者的心理情况，积极开展心理疏导工作，让患者感受到温暖和关怀，增强他们面对疾病的信心和勇气。

三、护士应该注意的礼仪细节

1.注意清洁

医院是一个高端的公共场所，因此，护士应当注重自身的清洁和身体的健康，经常进行体检和保健。

2.注意交谈礼仪

交谈时应避免使用俗语和粗口，尽量使用优美文雅的语言。同时，要注意说话的音量，不要大声喧哗。

3.注意思维礼仪

护士应当注重思维礼仪，在处理问题或是工作之前，要保持冷静理智、客观公正、善于分析和解决问题。

4.注意时间礼仪

护士应尽量遵守约定的时间，不要迟到或是提前，以免影响患者和医院的工作进程。

综上所述，护士的礼仪素质是提高医院的服务质量、树立良好的医疗形象和声誉的重要方面。因此，我们必须注重护士的礼仪培训和提高，让他们做到符合职业规范和道德标准，为患者提供最好的医疗服务。

本文的网址是http://www.zfw152.com/a/5660885.html